Pontiac 2006 Grand Prix Owners Manual Owner's

: Pontiac Pontiac-2006-Pontiac-Grand-Prix-Owners-Manual-818936 pontiac-2006-pontiac-grand-prix-owners-manual-818936 pontiac pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 472

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

2006 Pontiac Grand Prix Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1
Front Seats ............................................... 1-2
Rear Seats
............................................... 1-9
Safety Belts ............................................. 1-10
Child Restraints
....................................... 1-30
Airbag System
......................................... 1-52
Restraint System Check
............................ 1-67
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1
Keys
........................................................ 2-2
Doors and Locks ...................................... 2-10
Windows ................................................. 2-15
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-17
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
........... 2-21
Mirrors .................................................... 2-35
OnStar® System
...................................... 2-38
Storage Areas
......................................... 2-40
Sunroof
.................................................. 2-43
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4
Climate Controls
...................................... 3-26
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators
........ 3-35
Driver Information Center (DIC)
.................. 3-52
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-94

M

Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle
..... 4-2
Towing
................................................... 4-38
Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Service ..................................................... 5-3
Fuel ......................................................... 5-5
Checking Things Under the Hood
............... 5-10
Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 5-50
Bulb Replacement
.................................... 5-53
Windshield Replacement
........................... 5-60
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......... 5-60
Tires
...................................................... 5-60
Appearance Care
..................................... 5-99
Vehicle Identification
............................... 5-110
Electrical System
.................................... 5-111
Capacities and Specifications
................... 5-118
Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
Customer Assistance and Information .............. 7-1
Customer Assistance and Information
........... 7-2
Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-13
Index ................................................................ 1

Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, PONTIAC,
the PONTIAC Emblem, and the names GRAND
PRIX, GTP, and GXP are registered trademarks of
General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes
after that time without notice. For vehicles first sold in
Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of Canada
Limited” for Pontiac Division whenever it appears in
this manual.
Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be there if it is
needed while you are on the road. If the vehicle is
sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.

Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 06GRANDPRIX A First Printing
ii

How to Use This Manual
Many people read the owner manual from beginning to
end when they first receive their new vehicle. If this
is done, it can help you learn about the features
and controls for the vehicle. Pictures and words work
together in the owner manual to explain things.

Index
A good place to quickly locate information about the
vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is an
alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the
page number where it can be found.

©

2005 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book. We
use a box and the word CAUTION to tell about things
that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning.

You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Do Not,”
“Do Not do this” or “Do Not
let this happen.”

{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you do not,
you or others could be hurt.

iii

Vehicle Damage Warnings

Vehicle Symbols

Also, in this manual you will find these notices:

The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.

Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. But
the notice will tell what to do to help avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different
colors or in different words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

iv

If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage, or indicator, reference the
following topics:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
Features and Controls in Section 2
Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
Climate Controls in Section 3
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in Section 3
Audio System(s) in Section 3
Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:

v

✍ NOTES

vi

Section 1

Seats and Restraint Systems

Front Seats ......................................................1-2
Manual Passenger Seat ..................................1-2
Six-Way Power Driver Seat ..............................1-2
Power Lumbar ...............................................1-3
Heated Seats .................................................1-3
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-4
Head Restraints .............................................1-6
Passenger Folding Seatback ............................1-7
Rear Seats .......................................................1-9
Split Folding Rear Seat ...................................1-9
Safety Belts ...................................................1-10
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................1-10
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts ..............................................1-14
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-15
Driver Position ..............................................1-16
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment .....................1-22
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-23
Right Front Passenger Position .......................1-23
Rear Seat Passengers ..................................1-23
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ....................1-26
Safety Belt Pretensioners ...............................1-29
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-29

Child Restraints .............................................1-30
Older Children ..............................................1-30
Infants and Young Children ............................1-33
Child Restraint Systems .................................1-36
Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-40
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH) ......................................1-41
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position ............................................1-46
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position ....................................1-48
Airbag System ...............................................1-52
Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-55
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-57
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-59
How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-59
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .....1-60
Passenger Sensing System ............................1-61
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-65
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................1-66
Restraint System Check ..................................1-67
Checking the Restraint Systems ......................1-67
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ............................................1-67

1-1

Front Seats

Six-Way Power Driver Seat

Manual Passenger Seat

Driver’s Seat with 6–way Power, Power Lumbar, and
Manual Recline shown
Lift the bar located under the front of the seat to unlock
it. Slide the seat to where you want it and release
the bar. Try to move the seat with your body to be sure
the seat is locked in place.

1-2

The driver’s seat power control is located on the
outboard side of the seat.
• To move the seat forward or rearward, move the
control forward or rearward.
• To raise or lower the seat, move the control up
or down.
• To raise or lower the front of the seat, move the
front of the control up or down.
• To raise or lower the rear of the seat, move the
rear of the control up or down.

Power Lumbar

Heated Seats
If the vehicle has this
feature, the buttons are
located on the climate
control panel.

Press the button once to activate the high heat setting.
Both indicator lights next to the button will come on.
Driver’s Seat with Power Lumbar, 6-way Power, and
Manual Recline shown

Press the button again to select the lower temperature
setting. Only the bottom indicator light will come on.

Your driver’s seat may have power lumbar. The control
is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion.

Press the button a third time to turn the heat off.
This feature only works when the ignition is on.

Press the control forward to increase lumbar support.
Press the control rearward to decrease lumbar support.
Keep in mind that as your seating position changes,
as it may during long trips, so should the position of your
lumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed.

1-3

Reclining Seatbacks

{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it
is locked.
Pull up on the lever without pushing on the seatback,
and the seatback will return to an upright position.

Driver’s Seat with Manual Recline, 6-way Power, and
Power Lumbar shown
Lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat to
release the seatback, then move the seatback to the
desired position. Release the lever to lock the seatback
in place.

1-4

{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it
will not be against your body. Instead, it will be
in front of you. In a crash, you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.

Do not have a seatback reclined if the vehicle
is moving.

The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a
crash, the belt could go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not
at your pelvic bones. This could cause serious
internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety
belt properly.

1-5

Head Restraints
Pull up the head restraint
to raise it. Press the
release button, located at
the base of the head
restraint, and push
the head restraint down
to lower it.

Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is closest to the top of the occupant’s head. This
position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.

1-6

Passenger Folding Seatback

{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If you fold the seatback forward to carry longer
objects, such as skis, be sure any such cargo
is not near an airbag. In a crash, an inflating
airbag might force that object toward a person.
This could cause severe injury or even death.
Secure objects away from the area in which an
airbag would inflate. For more information, see
Where Are the Airbags? on page 1-55 and
Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-33.

Things you put on this seatback can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn,
or in a crash. Remove or secure all items
before driving.
If the vehicle has this feature, the front passenger seat
can be folded flat for more cargo space.

1-7

To return the seatback to the upright position, pull up on
the lever on the back of the seat. Push the seatback
up until it locks in place.

{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.

To fold the front passenger seatback flat, pull up on the
lever located on back of the seat. Push the seatback
forward until it locks in place.

1-8

Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.

Rear Seats

{CAUTION:
Split Folding Rear Seat
If your vehicle has this feature, both sides of the rear
seatback can be folded down. This gives direct access
to the trunk. Make sure the front seats are not
reclined. If they are, the rear seatback(s) may not fold
down all the way.
To lower the rear seatback,
pull the tab located on the
outboard side of the
seatback and fold the
seatback forward.

If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it
is locked.
To raise the rear seatback, lift the seatback up until it
latches. Push and pull on the seatback to be sure
it is locked in position.
The seatbacks should be kept in the upright, locked
position when they are not being used to extend
the cargo area.

1-9

Safety Belts
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.

1-10

{CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has indicators to remind you and your
passengers to buckle your safety belts. See Safety Belt
Reminder Light on page 3-38 and Passenger Safety
Belt Reminder Light on page 3-38.

In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
says to wear safety belts. Here is why: They work.
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a bad one.

Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt
or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter...a lot!

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat
on wheels.

1-11

Put someone on it.

1-12

Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.

The person keeps going until stopped by something. In
a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...

or the instrument panel...

1-13

Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident
if I am wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you are upside down. And your chance of
being conscious during and after an accident,
so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.

1-14

A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of them. Every airbag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you are in a vehicle that has
airbags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That is true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in an
accident — even one that is not your fault — you
and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).

How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-30
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-33. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you will want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We will start with the driver position.

Safety belts are for everyone.

1-15

Driver Position
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to wear
it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see
how, see “Seats” in the Index.

The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-29.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to the height
that is right for you. See Shoulder Belt Height
Adjustment on page 1-22.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.

1-16

6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would
be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-17

Q: What is wrong with this?

{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.

1-18

Q: What is wrong with this?

{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.

A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

1-19

Q: What is wrong with this?

{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.

A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.

1-20

Q: What is wrong with this?

{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.

A: The belt is twisted across the body.

1-21

Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt height
adjuster to the height that is right for you.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the
belt is centered on your shoulder. The belt should
be away from your face and neck, but not falling off
your shoulder.

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.

To move it down, pull the
release button (A) out and
move the height adjuster
to the desired position.
You can move the height
adjuster up just by pushing
up on the shoulder
belt guide.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.

After you move the height adjuster to where you want it,
try to move it down without pulling the release button
to make sure it has locked into position.

1-22

Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy

Right Front Passenger Position

Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.

To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
belt properly, see Driver Position on page 1-16.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt — except for one thing. If
you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all the
way, you will engage the child restraint locking feature.
If this happens, just let the belt go back all the way and
start again.

Rear Seat Passengers
It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in
the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those
who are wearing safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.

Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more
likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
1-23

Lap-Shoulder Belt
All rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts. Here is
how to wear one properly.

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way,
it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and
start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-29.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder part.
1-24

{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.

The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would
be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-25

Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt
away from the neck and head.
There is one guide for each outboard passenger
position in the rear seat. Here is how to install a comfort
guide and use the safety belt:

1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of
the seatback and the interior body to remove the
guide from its storage clip.

1-26

2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic
cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide
over the belt, and insert the two edges of the
belt into the slots of the guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.

1-27

{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may
not provide the protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could be seriously
injured. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts
of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described in Rear Seat Passengers on page 1-23.
Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the
shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guides. Pull the guide upward to expose its storage
clip, and then slide the guide onto the clip. Turn
the guide and clip inward and slide them in between the
seatback and the interior body, leaving only the loop
of the elastic cord exposed.

1-28

Safety Belt Pretensioners

Safety Belt Extender

Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the driver
and right front passenger. Although you cannot see
them, they are located on the buckle end of the safety
belts. They help the safety belts reduce a person’s
forward movement in a moderate to severe frontal and
near frontal crash.

If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.

Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1-67.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer will
order you an extender. It is free. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and
use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has
been designed for adults. Never use it for securing
child seats. To wear it, just attach it to the regular safety
belt. For more information, see the instruction sheet
that comes with the extender.

1-29

Child Restraints
Older Children

Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the
hips, just touching the top of the thighs. It should
never be worn over the abdomen, which could
cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in
a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.

Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

1-30

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?

A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window,
move the child toward the center of the vehicle.
Also see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides on
page 1-26. If the child is sitting in the center rear
seat passenger position, move the child toward the
safety belt buckle. In either case, be sure that
the shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so
that in a crash the child’s upper body would
have the restraint the belts provide.

{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can not properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.

1-31

{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt in
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.

1-32

Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.

{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby does not
weigh much — until a crash. During a crash a
baby will become so heavy it is not possible to
hold it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly
become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a person’s
arms. A baby should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.

1-33

{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.

Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.

1-34

For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint, state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.

{CAUTION:
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This
is necessary because a newborn infant’s neck
is weak and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into the
restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest part of an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants
always should be secured in appropriate infant
restraints.

{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children always should be secured in
appropriate child restraints.

1-35

Child Restraint Systems

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.

1-36

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the
seating surface against the back of the infant. The
harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,
acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Some
booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and some
high-back booster seats have a five-point harness. A
booster seat can also help a child to see out the window.

1-37

Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner. To help reduce
injuries, an add-on child restraint must be secured
in the vehicle. With built-in or add-on child
restraints, the child has to be secured within the
child restraint.
When choosing an add-on child restraint, be sure
the child restraint is designed to be used in a
vehicle. If it is, it will have a label saying that it
meets federal motor vehicle safety standards. Then
follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both.

1-38

Securing an Add-on Child Restraint in
the Vehicle

{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child restraint is not properly
secured in the vehicle. Make sure the child
restraint is properly installed in the vehicle
using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came
with that restraint, and also the instructions in
this manual.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-41 for more information. A child can
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be on
the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important, so
if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy
from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child
is in it.

Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint

{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child is not properly secured in the
child restraint. Make sure the child is properly
secured, following the instructions that came
with that restraint.
Because there are different systems, it is important to
refer to the instructions that come with the restraint.
A child can be endangered in a crash if the child is not
properly secured in the child restraint.

There are several systems for securing the child within
the child restraint. One system, the three-point
harness, has straps that come down over each of the
infant’s shoulders and buckle together at the crotch. The
five-point harness system has two shoulder straps,
two hip straps, and a crotch strap. A shield may take the
place of hip straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder
straps that are attached to a flat pad which rests
low against the child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type
shield has straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like
shield that swings up or to the side.

1-39

Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We
recommend that child restraints be secured in a rear
seat, including an infant riding in a rear-facing infant
seat, a child riding in a forward-facing child seat and an
older child riding in a booster seat.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a
rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This
is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if
the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
CAUTION:

1-40

(Continued)

CAUTION:

(Continued)

Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one
can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will
go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to secure
the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no
child is in it.

Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)

Your vehicle has lower anchors and top tether anchors.
Your child restraint may have lower attachments and
a top tether.

Your vehicle has the LATCH system. The LATCH
system holds a child restraint during driving or in a
crash. This system is designed to make installation of a
child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses
anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child
restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system

Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint
is properly installed using the anchors, or use the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint, following
the instructions that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual. When installing a
child restraint with a top tether, you must also use either
the lower anchors or the safety belts to properly
secure the child restraint. A child restraint must never
be installed using only the top tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint equipped with LATCH
attachments. The child restraint manufacturer will
provide you with instructions on how to use the child
restraint and its attachments. The following explains how
to attach a child restraint with these attachments in
your vehicle.

Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).

1-41

Top Tether Anchor

Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
Some top tether-equipped child restraints are designed
for use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. In the United States, some child restraints also
have a top tether. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for your child restraint.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask
the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.

A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.

1-42

Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations

i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.

Rear Seat

To assist you in locating
the lower anchors, each
seating position with lower
anchors has two labels,
near the crease between
the seatback and the seat
cushion, showing where
the anchors are located.

To assist you in locating
the top tether anchors,
the top tether anchor
symbol is located on the
trim cover.

The top tether anchors are located on the rear seatback
filler panel. Open the trim cover to access the anchors.
Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side
of the vehicle as the seating position where the
child restraint will be placed.

1-43

Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System

{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to anchors, the restraint will not be able to
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child
could be seriously injured or killed. Make sure
that a LATCH-type child restraint is properly
installed using the anchors, or use the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that came with
that restraint, and also the instructions in
this manual.
Do not secure a child restraint in the right front
passenger’s position if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached. There is no place to attach the top
tether in this position.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. See
Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-40 for additional
information.

1-44

{CAUTION:
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor in the
vehicle is designed to hold only one child
restraint. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the
anchor or attachment to come loose or even
break during a crash. A child or others could
be injured if this happens. To help prevent
injury to people and damage to your vehicle,
attach only one child restraint per anchor.

1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. Pull open the top tether anchor trim cover to
expose the anchor.
2.3. Route, attach, and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
If the position you are
using does not have a
head restraint and you are
using a single tether,
route the tether over
the seatback.

If the position you are
using does not have a
head restraint and you are
using a dual tether,
route the tether over
the seatback.

1-45

If the position you are
using has a fixed head
restraint and you are using
a single tether, route the
tether over the head
restraint.

If the position you are
using has a fixed head
restraint and you are using
a dual tether, route the
tether around the
head restraint.

3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.

1-46

Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-41.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.

3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.

1-47

7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, if the top tether is attached
to the top tether anchor, disconnect it. Unbuckle the
vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way. The
safety belt will move freely again and be ready to
work for an adult or larger child passenger.

Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s airbag. A rear
seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing child
restraint. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-40.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. If your child restraint manufacturer recommends
using a top tether, attach and tighten the top
tether to the top tether anchor. Refer to the
instructions that came with the child restraint and
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-41.

1-48

In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system. The passenger sensing system is designed to
turn off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag
when an infant in a rear-facing infant seat or a small
child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat is
detected. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-61
and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-40
for more information on this including important
safety information.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one
can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat position, move the seat as far
back as it will go before securing the forward-facing
child restraint. See Manual Passenger Seat on page 1-2.
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-41.

There is no top tether anchor at the right front seating
position. Do not secure a child seat in this position
if a national or local law requires that the top tether be
anchored or if the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top tether must be anchored.
See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 1-41 if the child restraint has a top tether.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s frontal
airbag. See Passenger Sensing System on
page 1-61. General Motors recommends that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in a rear seat,
even if the airbag is off. If your child restraint is
forward-facing, move the seat as far back as it will
go before securing the child restraint in this
seat. See Manual Passenger Seat on page 1-2.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off
indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when you turn the ignition to
RUN or START. See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 3-40.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

1-49

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-50

7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
8. If the airbag is off, the off indicator on the instrument
panel will be lit and stay lit when the key is turned
to RUN or START.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint.

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt. You should not be
able to pull more of the belt from the retractor
once the lock has been set.

If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.

1-51

Airbag System
Your vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driver and a
frontal airbag for the right front passenger. Your vehicle
may also have roof-mounted side impact airbags.
Roof-mounted side impact airbags are available for the
driver and the passenger seated directly behind the
driver and for the right front passenger and the
passenger seated directly behind that passenger.
If your vehicle has side impact airbags, the words
AIR BAG will appear on the airbag covering on the
ceiling near the driver’s and right front
passenger’s window.
Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating frontal airbag.
But these airbags must inflate very quickly to do their
job and comply with federal regulations.

1-52

Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:

{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Airbags are “supplemental
restraints” to the safety belts. All airbags are
designed to work with safety belts but do not
replace them.
CAUTION:

(Continued)

CAUTION:

(Continued)

Frontal airbags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to deploy in moderate
to severe frontal and near frontal crashes. They
are not designed to inflate in rollover, rear
crashes, or in many side crashes. And, for some
unrestrained occupants, frontal airbags may
provide less protection in frontal crashes than
more forceful airbags have provided in the past.
Roof-mounted side impact airbags are designed
to inflate in moderate to severe crashes where
something hits the side of your vehicle. They
are not designed to inflate in frontal, in rollover
or in rear crashes. Everyone in your vehicle
should wear a safety belt properly — whether or
not there is an airbag for that person.

{CAUTION:
Both frontal and side impact airbags inflate
with great force, faster than the blink of an
eye. If you are too close to an inflating airbag,
as you would be if you were leaning forward, it
could seriously injure you. Safety belts help
keep you in position for airbag inflation before
and during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt even with frontal airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible while still
maintaining control of the vehicle. Occupants
should not lean on or sleep against the door.

1-53

{CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer the best protection for adults, but
not for young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
see Older Children on page 1-30 or Infants and
Young Children on page 1-33.

1-54

There is an airbag
readiness light on
the instrument panel
cluster, which shows the
airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-39
for more information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The right front passenger’s airbag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger’s side.
The driver’s airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.

1-55

The side impact airbag for the driver and the person
seated directly behind the driver is in the ceiling above
the side windows.

1-56

The side impact airbag for the right front passenger and
the person seated directly behind that passenger is in
the ceiling above the side windows.

When Should an Airbag Inflate?

{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put
anything between an occupant and an airbag,
and do not attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other
airbag covering. And, if your vehicle has
roof-mounted side impact airbags, never
secure anything to the roof of your vehicle by
routing the rope or tiedown through any door
or window opening. If you do, the path of an
inflating side impact airbag will be blocked.
The path of an inflating airbag must be
kept clear.

The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal airbags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate
only if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment
threshold. Deployment thresholds take into account
a variety of desired deployment and non-deployment
events and are used to predict how severe a crash
is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help
restrain the occupants. Whether your frontal airbags
will or should deploy is not based on how fast your
vehicle is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit,
the direction of the impact and how quickly your
vehicle slows down.

1-57

In addition, your vehicle has “dual-stage” frontal airbags,
which adjust the restraint according to crash severity.
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic frontal sensors
which help the sensing system distinguish between a
moderate frontal impact and a more severe frontal
impact. For moderate frontal impacts, these airbags
inflate at a level less than full deployment. For
more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs. If
the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall
that does not move or deform, the threshold level for
the reduced deployment is about 12 to 16 mph
(19 to 26 km/h), and the threshold level for a full
deployment is about 18 to 24 mph (29 to 38.5 km/h).
The threshold level can vary, however, with specific
vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat above
or below this range.

Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole) the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
Frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger) are not
intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts.

1-58

Your vehicle may or may not have side impact airbags.
See Airbag System on page 1-52. Side impact airbags
are intended to inflate in moderate to severe side
crashes. A side impact airbag will inflate if the crash
severity is above the system’s designed threshold level.
The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle design.
Side impact airbags are not intended to inflate in frontal or
near-frontal impacts, rollovers or rear impacts. A side
impact airbag is intended to deploy on the side of the
vehicle that is struck.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by
what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down. For side impact
airbags, inflation is determined by the location and
severity of the impact.

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. The
sensing system triggers a release of gas from the
inflator, which inflates the airbag. The inflator, airbag,
and related hardware are all part of the airbag modules
inside the steering wheel and in the instrument panel
in front of the right front passenger. For vehicles
with side impact airbags, there are also airbag modules
in the ceiling of the vehicle, near the side windows.

How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. The airbag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But the
frontal airbags would not help you in many types
of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and many
side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion
is not toward the airbag. Side impact airbags would not
help you in many types of collisions, including many
frontal or near frontal collisions, and rear impacts,
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward
those airbags. Airbags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement to safety belts, and
then only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal
collisions for the driver’s and right front passenger’s
frontal airbags, and only in moderate to severe
side collisions for side impact airbags.

1-59

What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates?
After a frontal airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, so
quickly that some people may not even realize
the airbag inflated. Roof-mounted side impact airbags
deflate more slowly and may still be at least partially
inflated minutes after the vehicle comes to rest. Some
components of the airbag module — the steering wheel
hub for the driver’s airbag, the instrument panel for
the right front passenger’s bag or the ceiling of
your vehicle near the side windows — may be hot for a
short time. The parts of the bag that come into
contact with you may be warm, but not too hot to touch.
There will be some smoke and dust coming from the
vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does
not prevent the driver from seeing out of the windshield
or being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop
people from leaving the vehicle.

1-60

{CAUTION:
When an airbag inflates, there is dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe
to do so. If you have breathing problems but
cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
window or a door. If you experience breathing
problems following an airbag deployment, you
should seek medical attention.

In many crashes severe enough to inflate an airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger airbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
your airbag system. If you do not get them,
the airbag system will not be there to help protect
you in another crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly other parts. The
service manual for your vehicle covers the need to
replace other parts.

• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and

Passenger Sensing System
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system. The
passenger airbag status indicator on the instrument
panel will be visible when you turn your ignition key to
RUN or START. The words ON and OFF or the symbol
for on and off, will be visible during the system check.
If you use remote start to start your vehicle from a
distance, if equipped, you may not see the system
check. When the system check is complete, either the
word ON or the word OFF, or the symbol for on or
the symbol for off will be visible. See Passenger Airbag
Status Indicator on page 3-40.

diagnostic module which records information after
a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders on page 7-9.

• Let only qualified technicians work on your airbag
system. Improper service can mean that your
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer for service.

Passenger
Airbag Status
Indicator – United
States

Passenger
Airbag Status
Indicator – Canada

The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver’s airbag and the side airbags are not part
of the passenger sensing system.
1-61

The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger’s seat. The
sensors are designed to detect the presence of a
properly-seated occupant and determine if the
passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled (may
inflate) or not.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are
restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. General
Motors recommends that child restraints be secured in a
rear seat, including an infant riding in a rear-facing infant
seat, a child riding in a forward-facing child seat, and an
older child riding in a booster seat.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a
rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This
is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if
the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one
can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will
go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.

1-62

The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:

• the right front passenger seat is unoccupied
• the system determines that an infant is present in a
rear-facing infant seat

• the system determines that a small child is present
in a forward-facing child restraint

• the system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat

• a right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time

• the right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints

• or if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicator
on the instrument panel will light and stay lit to remind
you that the airbag is off.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint
following the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position on page 1-48.

If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer.
The passenger sensing system is designed to enable
(may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult
size is sitting properly in the right front passenger’s
seat. When the passenger sensing system has allowed
the airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light
and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag, depending upon the person’s seating
posture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who
has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.

1-63

If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat. If
this happens, turn the vehicle off and ask the person to
place the seatback in the fully upright position, then sit
upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with the
person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the vehicle
and have the person remain in this position for about
two minutes. This will allow the system to detect that
person and then enable the passenger’s airbag.

{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it
means that something may be wrong with the
airbag system. If this ever happens, have the
vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the frontal airbag. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 3-39 for more on this, including
important safety information.
A thick layer of additional material such as a blanket, or
aftermarket equipment such as seat covers, seat heaters,
and seat massagers, can affect how well the passenger
sensing system operates. Remove any additional
material from the seat cushion before reinstalling or
securing the child restraint and before a small occupant,
including a small adult, sits in the passenger position.

1-64

You may want to consider not using seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment if your vehicle has the passenger
sensing system. See Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-66 for more
information about modifications that can affect how the
system operates.
The passenger sensing system may suppress the
airbag deployment when liquid is soaked into the seat. If
this happens, the off indicator in the passenger airbag
status indicator and the airbag readiness light on
the instrument panel will be lit. The system should
resume normal operation after the seat is allowed to dry.
If the system operates incorrectly after the seat has
dried, have your dealer check the system.

{CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s seat
or between the passenger’s seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the proper
operation of the passenger sensing system.

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around your vehicle. You do not want the system to
inflate while someone is working on your vehicle. Your
dealer and the service manual have information
about servicing your vehicle and the airbag system. To
purchase a service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 7-14.

{CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
airbag can still inflate during improper service.
You can be injured if you are close to an
airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.

1-65

Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle

Q: Is there anything I might add to the front or
sides of the vehicle that could keep the
airbags from working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, front end or side sheet
metal or height, they may keep the airbag system
from working properly. Also, the airbag system may
not work properly if you relocate any of the airbag
sensors. If you have any questions about this,
you should contact Customer Service before you
modify your vehicle. The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two
of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this
manual. See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on
page 7-2.

1-66

Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?

A: Changing or moving any parts of the front seats,
safety belts, the airbag sensing and diagnostic
module (located under the right front passenger’s
seat), or the instrument panel can affect the
operation of the airbag system. If you have
questions, call Customer Assistance. The phone
numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance
are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure in this manual. See Customer
Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.

Restraint System Check

Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash

Checking the Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s airbag, or the side
impact airbag covering (if equipped) on the ceiling
near the side windows, the airbag may not work
properly. You may have to replace the airbag
module in the steering wheel, both the airbag
module and the instrument panel for the right front
passenger’s airbag, or side impact airbag module
and ceiling covering for roof-mounted side impact
airbags (if equipped.) Do not open or break the
airbag coverings.

{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may
not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn
during a more severe crash, then you need new parts.

1-67

If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system was not being used at the time of
the collision.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.

1-68

If the frontal airbags inflate, you will also need to
replace the driver’s and right front passenger’s safety
belt buckle assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the
new buckle assembly will be there to help protect you in
a collision.
After a crash you may need to replace the driver and
front passenger’s safety belt buckle assemblies, even if
the frontal airbags have not deployed. The driver
and front passenger’s safety belt buckle assemblies
contain the safety belt pretensioners. Have your safety
belt pretensioners checked if your vehicle has been
in a collision, or if your airbag readiness light stays on
after you start your vehicle or while you are driving. See
Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-39.

Section 2

Features and Controls

Keys ...............................................................2-2
Remote Keyless Entry System .........................2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2-4
Doors and Locks ............................................2-10
Door Locks ..................................................2-10
Power Door Locks ........................................2-11
Delayed Locking ...........................................2-11
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ..............2-12
Rear Door Security Locks ..............................2-12
Lockout Protection ........................................2-13
Trunk ..........................................................2-13
Windows ........................................................2-15
Power Windows ............................................2-16
Sun Visors ...................................................2-17
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-17
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-17
PASS-Key® III ..............................................2-19
PASS-Key® III Operation ...............................2-20
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-21
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-21
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-22
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................2-22
Starting the Engine .......................................2-23
Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-24

Displacement on Demand™ (DoD™)
(5.3L Engine) ............................................2-25
Automatic Transaxle Operation .......................2-25
Parking Brake ..............................................2-30
Shifting Into Park (P) .....................................2-31
Shifting Out of Park (P) .................................2-32
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-33
Engine Exhaust ............................................2-33
Running the Engine While Parked ...................2-34
Mirrors ...........................................................2-35
Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ..............2-35
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
Compass and Temperature Display ..............2-35
Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-37
Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-38
OnStar® System .............................................2-38
Storage Areas ................................................2-40
Glove Box ...................................................2-40
Cupholder(s) ................................................2-41
Overhead Console ........................................2-42
Front Seat Storage Net .................................2-42
Center Console Storage Area .........................2-42
Assist Handles .............................................2-42
Convenience Net ..........................................2-43
Sunroof .........................................................2-43

2-1

Keys

{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. They
could operate the power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. The
children or others could be badly injured or
even killed. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.

2-2

The key can be used for
the ignition, as well as the
driver’s door lock and
storage compartments.

In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance. See
Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6 for
more information.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
If the vehicle has the OnStar ® system with an active
subscription, and the keys are locked inside the vehicle,
OnStar ® may be able to send a command to unlock
the vehicle. See OnStar® System on page 2-38 for
more information.

Remote Keyless Entry System
The key comes with a bar coded tag attached to the
key ring. Keep this bar coded tag and give it to
your dealer if a new key needs to be made.
The vehicle has the PASS-Key® III vehicle theft system.
The key has a transponder in the key head that
matches a decoder in the vehicle’s instrument panel.
The key will have PK3 stamped on it. If a replacement
key or an additional key is needed, it must be
purchased from your dealer.
Any new PASS-Key® III key must be programmed
before it will start the vehicle. See PASS-Key® III on
page 2-19 for more information on programming a
new key.

Your keyless entry system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.

2-3

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:

Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
The vehicle’s doors can be locked and unlocked, and
the trunk can be opened from approximately 3 feet (1 m)
up to 60 feet (18 m) away with the remote keyless
entry transmitter.
If your vehicle has the remote vehicle start feature, you
can also start the vehicle’s engine with the remote
keyless entry transmitter.

• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.

• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
page 2-4.

• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
2-4

Remote Keyless Entry
with Remote Start

Remote Keyless Entry
without Remote Start

The following functions may be available with your
vehicle’s remote keyless entry system:

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle has this
feature, the engine may be started from outside
the vehicle using the remote keyless entry transmitter.
See “Remote Vehicle Start” later in this section for more
detailed information.
Q (Lock):

Press the lock button to lock all the doors.
If enabled through the Driver Information Center
(DIC), the parking lamps may flash once and the horn
may chirp once to indicate locking has occurred.
See “REMOTE LOCKS FEEDBACK” under DIC Controls
and Displays (Base Level DIC) on page 3-52 or DIC
Controls and Displays (Uplevel DIC with Trip Computer)
on page 3-60 for programming information. Pressing
the lock button will arm the content theft-deterrent
system. See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-17 for
more information.

" (Unlock):

Press the unlock button one time to unlock
the driver’s door. Press the unlock button again within
five seconds to unlock the other doors. The interior
lamps will come on and stay on for 20 seconds or until
the ignition is turned on. If enabled through the DIC,
the parking lamps may flash once and the horn
may chirp once to indicate unlocking has occurred. See
“REMOTE LOCKS FEEDBACK” under DIC Controls
and Displays (Base Level DIC) on page 3-52 or
DIC Controls and Displays (Uplevel DIC with Trip
Computer) on page 3-60. Pressing the unlock button on
the remote keyless entry transmitter will disarm the
content theft-deterrent system. See Content
Theft-Deterrent on page 2-17 for more details.

V (Trunk Release): Press this button to release the
trunk lid. The transaxle must be in PARK (P) for this
feature to operate.
L (Panic Alarm): Press this button to activate the
alarm. The ignition must be in OFF for the remote alarm
to work. When the remote alarm button is pressed
the headlamps will flash and the horn will sound
repeatedly for two minutes. The alarm will turn off when
the ignition is moved to RUN or the remote alarm
button is pressed again.

2-5

Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your GM dealer. Remember to
bring any additional transmitters with you when you
go to your dealer. When the dealer matches the
replacement transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining
transmitters must also be matched. Once your dealer
has coded the new transmitter, the lost transmitter
cannot unlock your vehicle. The vehicle can have a
maximum of four transmitters matched to it.

Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.

Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in the remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about four years.
If the battery is weak the transmitter will not work within
its normal range. It is probably time to change the
battery if you have to be very close to the vehicle before
the transmitter works.
The KEY FOB BATTERY LOW message, in the
vehicle’s DIC, will display, if the remote keyless entry
transmitter battery is low.

2-6

To replace the battery in the remote keyless entry
transmitter, do the following:
1. Insert a flat object with a thin edge into the notch,
located below the panic alarm button, and separate
the bottom half from the top half of the transmitter.

2. Remove the old battery and replace it with the new
one. Make sure the positive side (+) of the battery
faces up. Use one three-volt, CR2032 battery,
or equivalent type.
3. Put the two halves back together. Make sure the
cover is on tight so water will not get inside the
transmitter.
4. Test the operation of the transmitter with
the vehicle.

Remote Vehicle Start
Your vehicle may have a remote start feature. This
feature allows you to start the engine from outside the
vehicle. It may also start the vehicle’s heating or air
conditioning systems and rear window defogger. When
the remote start system is active, the climate control
system will heat or cool the inside of the vehicle based
on the outside temperature. The rear window defogger
will be turned on by the climate control system when it is
heating the inside of the vehicle. Normal operation of
the system will return after the key is turned to RUN.
Laws in some communities may restrict the use of
remote starters. For example, some laws may require a
person using remote start to have the vehicle in view
when doing so. Check local regulations for any
requirements on remote starting of vehicles.

Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is low
on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.
The remote start feature provides two separate starts
per ignition cycle, each with 10 minutes of engine
running time.
The remote start system needs to be reset after your
vehicle’s engine is started two times using the
transmitter’s remote start button. The remote start
system is reset by inserting the vehicle’s key into the
ignition switch and turning to RUN. See Ignition
Positions on page 2-22 for information regarding the
ignition positions on your vehicle.
Your remote keyless entry transmitter with the
remote start button provides an increased range of
operation. You can start your vehicle from approximately
492 feet (150 m) away. However, the range may be
less while the vehicle is running, and as a result
you may need to be closer to your vehicle to turn it off
than you were to turn it on.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter, see Remote Keyless
Entry System on page 2-3 for additional information.

2-7

/ (Remote Start): If your vehicle has the remote
vehicle start feature, the keyless entry transmitter will
have a button with this symbol on it.
To start the vehicle using the remote start feature, do
the following:
1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.
2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock button,
then immediately press and hold the transmitter’s
remote start button for 4 seconds or until the
vehicle’s turn signal lamps flash. The vehicle’s doors
will be locked.
3. When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turn
on and remain on while the engine is running, and
the DIC will display REMOTE START ACTIVE
PRESS HAZARD SWITCH TO CANCEL.
The engine will shut off automatically after
10 minutes, unless a time extension has been done
or the vehicle’s key is inserted into the ignition
switch and turned to RUN.
If you enter the vehicle after a remote start, and the
engine is still running, insert the key into the
ignition switch and turn to RUN to drive the vehicle.

2-8

4. To manually shut off a remote start, do any of the
following. The parking lamps will turn off.

• Aim the remote keyless entry transmitter at the
vehicle, and press the remote start button.

• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Turn the ignition switch to RUN and then to OFF.
Your vehicle’s engine can be started two times using the
transmitter’s remote start feature. If only one remote
start procedure has been done, since last driving
the vehicle, or resetting the remote start system, the
engine may be started again remotely by following the
remote start procedure a second time.
If the remote start procedure is used again before
the first 10 minute time frame has ended, the first
10 minutes will immediately expire and the second
10 minute time frame will start.

A door on the vehicle is open.

Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start feature are
shipped from the factory with the remote start system
enabled. The system may be enabled/disabled through
the DIC. See “REMOTE START” under DIC Controls
and Displays (Base Level DIC) on page 3-52 or
DIC Controls and Displays (Uplevel DIC with Trip
Computer) on page 3-60 for additional information.

The vehicle’s hood is open.

Remote Start Ready

The hazard warning flashers are on.

If your vehicle does not have the remote vehicle start
feature, it may have the remote start ready feature. This
feature allows your dealer to add the manufacturer’s
remote vehicle start feature.

The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if any
of the following occur:

• The remote start system is disabled through
the DIC.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

The vehicle’s key is in the ignition.

There is an emission control system malfunction.
The engine coolant temperature is too high.
The oil pressure is low.
Two remote vehicle starts have already been
provided for that ignition cycle.

If a remote start is attempted and is unsuccessful, the
Driver Information Center (DIC) will display REMOTE
START DISABLED.

If the keyless entry transmitter has a plus (+) symbol on
the back cover, your vehicle has the remote start
ready feature. You can lock or unlock your vehicle from
approximately 492 feet (150 m) away.
See your dealer if you would like to add the
manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature to
your vehicle.

2-9

Doors and Locks
Door Locks

{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers — especially children — can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the
handle will not open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle
in a crash if the doors are not locked. So,
wear safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.

2-10

There are several ways to lock and unlock the vehicle.
From the outside, use the key or remote keyless
entry transmitter.
From the inside, use the manual or power door locks.
To manually lock or unlock
the doors from inside the
vehicle, push down or
pull up on the door lock pin
located on the top of
each door panel.

Power Door Locks

Delayed Locking
To lock or unlock all doors
from inside the vehicle,
use the power door
lock switch located on
either front door.

This feature delays the locking of the vehicle’s doors for
five seconds after the last door is closed. Two chimes
will sound when the power door lock switch or the LOCK
button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is
pressed when a door is open. The chimes indicate that
the delayed locking feature is on.
The doors can be locked immediately by pressing the
power door lock switch or the LOCK button on the
transmitter a second time.
The delayed locking feature will not activate when the
ignition is in RUN or ACC.

Driver’s Side
Move the switch on the driver’s door to the right to lock
or to the left to unlock the doors. Move the switch on
the passenger’s door to the left to lock or to the right to
unlock the doors.

You can program this feature on or off through the
Driver Information Center (DIC) See “Personal
Programming Mode Screens” under DIC Controls and
Displays (Base Level DIC) on page 3-52 or DIC Controls
and Displays (Uplevel DIC with Trip Computer) on
page 3-60.

If the vehicle has the content theft-deterrent system, the
vehicle may be programmed to arm the system with
the power door lock switch. See “Lock Switch Arm”
under DIC Controls and Displays (Base Level DIC) on
page 3-52 or DIC Controls and Displays (Uplevel
DIC with Trip Computer) on page 3-60 for more
information on programming the system.

2-11

Programmable Automatic
Door Locks
The vehicle’s doors are programmed from the factory to
lock when the shift lever is moved into a forward
gear, and to unlock when the shift lever is moved into
PARK (P).

Rear Door Security Locks
Your vehicle may have rear door security locks. These
prevent passengers from opening the rear doors
from the inside.
The rear door security
locks are located on the
inside edge of each
rear door. You must
open the rear doors to
access them.

If someone needs to get in or out of the vehicle after
the doors have been locked, place the shift lever
into PARK (P). You may also unlock all doors using the
power door lock switch or unlock one door using the
inside manual door lock.
To program other door locking/unlocking combinations,
see “Personal Programming Mode Screens” under
DIC Controls and Displays (Base Level DIC) on
page 3-52 or DIC Controls and Displays (Uplevel DIC
with Trip Computer) on page 3-60.

To set the locks, do the following:
1. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
so the slot is in the horizontal position.
2. Close the door.

2-12

When you want to open a rear door when the security
lock is on, do the following:
1. Unlock the door using the remote keyless entry
transmitter, if equipped, the power door lock
switch, or by lifting the rear door manual lock.
2. Open the door from the outside.
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
so the slot is in the vertical position.

Lockout Protection
The lockout protection feature makes it more difficult to
lock the key in the vehicle. If the driver’s door is
open while the key is in the ignition, the door cannot be
locked with the power door lock switch.
This feature cannot guarantee that you will never be
locked out of the vehicle. If the key is not left in
the ignition, or, if the manual door lock pin is used, the
key could still be locked inside the vehicle. Always
remember to take the key with you.

Trunk

{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You cannot see or
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death. If you must drive with the trunk lid
open or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the trunk lid:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See Climate Control
System.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See Engine Exhaust on page 2-33.
To unlock and open the trunk from the outside, press the
trunk button on the remote keyless entry transmitter. See
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on page 2-4.
2-13

To open the trunk from the inside, use the power door
lock switch located on the driver’s or front passenger’s
door. See “Remote Trunk Release” following.
The vehicle must be in PARK (P) in order for the trunk
to open.
If the vehicle has lost power, you can open the trunk by
lowering the rear seat and pulling the emergency
trunk release handle located in the trunk. See Split
Folding Rear Seat on page 1-9 and “Emergency Trunk
Release Handle” following.

Emergency Trunk Release Handle
Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk release
handle as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the trunk as it could damage the handle.
The emergency trunk release handle is only
intended to aid a person trapped in a latched trunk,
enabling them to open the trunk from the inside.

Remote Trunk Release
This feature is used to unlock the trunk from inside the
vehicle using the power door lock switch.
Press and hold the
driver’s side power
door lock switch to the
left, or the passenger’s
side power door lock
switch to the right to
unlock the trunk.

Driver’s Side

2-14

There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release
handle located on the trunk latch of the trunk lid.
This handle will glow following exposure to light. If ever
needed, pull the emergency trunk release handle to
open the trunk from the inside.

Windows

{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.

2-15

Express-Down Window

Power Windows
Use the switches on
the driver’s door armrest
to operate each of
the windows.

The driver’s window switch has an express-down
feature. This allows the window to open fully without
having to continuously hold the switch. Tap the switch
rearward, and the driver’s window will open a small
amount. Press the switch fully rearward and release and
the window will go all the way down.
To stop the window while it is lowering, press the front
of the switch. To raise the window, press and hold
the front of the switch.

Window Lockout

Push the switch rearward or forward to open or close
the window. The top switches operate the front windows,
and the bottom switches operate the rear windows.
Each passenger door also has a switch that operates
that window.
The power window switches only work if the ignition is
on or in ACC, or while Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
is active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 2-22 for more information.

2-16

o (Window Lockout): The driver’s window switch
includes a lockout feature located above the power
window switches on the driver’s door armrest. Move the
switch to the right to prevent the passengers sitting in
the rear from using their window switches. The
driver can still control all the windows with the lockout
on. Move the switch to the left to disengage the
lockout feature.

Sun Visors

Content Theft-Deterrent

To help block out glare, pull the sun visors down. Pull
on the inside edges of the sun visors to swing them from
the front windshield to the side window.

The vehicle has a content theft-deterrent alarm system.

Visor Vanity Mirror
Raise the cover on the top of the sun visor to expose
the vanity mirror. If the vehicle has lighted vanity mirrors,
the lamps come on when the cover is opened.

A red light located on top
of the instrument panel,
toward the center of
the vehicle and near
the windshield, will flash
slowly when the system
is armed.

Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal.

The theft-deterrent alarm system needs to be activated
through the Driver’s Information Center (DIC). See “Theft
Deterrent” under the Personal Programming Mode
Screens in DIC Controls and Displays (Base Level DIC)
on page 3-52 or DIC Controls and Displays (Uplevel DIC
with Trip Computer) on page 3-60. While armed, the
doors will not unlock with the power door lock switch. The
remote alarm will sound if someone tampers with the
trunk or enters the vehicle without using the remote
keyless entry transmitter or key to unlock the doors. The
horn will sound and the headlamps will flash for up to
two minutes. The system will also cut off the fuel supply,
preventing the vehicle from being driven.
2-17

Arming with the Power Lock Switch
The vehicle’s content theft-deterrent alarm system can
be activated when the key is removed from the ignition
and the power door lock switch of either the driver’s or
front passenger’s door is used to lock the vehicle. The
door needs to be in the open position when pressing the
power door lock switch. The alarm system will not
activate if the door is closed and the power door lock
switch is pressed. This system can be activated through
the Driver’s Information Center (DIC). See “Lock Switch
Arm” under the Personal Programming Mode Screens in
DIC Controls and Displays (Base Level DIC) on
page 3-52 or DIC Controls and Displays (Uplevel DIC
with Trip Computer) on page 3-60.
When the doors are locked using the power door lock
switch of either front door, the red light, on top of the
instrument panel will start flashing indicating that the
system is arming. After all the doors are closed there will
be a time delay and then the red light will begin to flash at
a very slow rate indicating the system is armed.

2-18

Arming with the Remote Keyless
Entry Transmitter
The alarm system will arm when the remote keyless
entry transmitter is used to lock the doors after the key
is removed from the ignition. The red light will come
on to indicate that the system is arming. After all doors
are closed and locked, and after a time delay, the
red light will begin flashing at a very slow rate to show
the system is armed.

Arming Confirmation
A red light located on top of the instrument panel,
towards the center of the vehicle and near the
windshield, will flash slowly to confirm when the
system is armed.

Disarming with the Remote Keyless
Entry Transmitter
The alarm system will disarm when the remote keyless
entry transmitter is used to unlock the doors. The
red light will go out to show that the system is disarmed.

Disarming with Your Key
The alarm system will disarm when the key is used to
unlock the doors. The red light will stop flashing
when the system is disarmed. If you would like the key
to disarm the alarm system, see “Personal Programming
Mode Screens” under DIC Controls and Displays
(Base Level DIC) on page 3-52 or DIC Controls and
Displays (Uplevel DIC with Trip Computer) on page 3-60
for more information.

PASS-Key® III

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
PASS-Key® III uses a radio frequency transponder in
the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle.

Your PASS-Key® III system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.

2-19

PASS-Key® III Operation
The vehicle is equipped
with PASS-Key® III
(Personalized Automotive
Security System)
theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key® III is a passive
theft-deterrent system.
This means nothing special
needs to be done to arm
or disarm the system.
It works when the key is
inserted or removed
from the ignition.
PASS-Key® III uses a transponder in the ignition key
that matches a decoder in the vehicle.
When the PASS-Key® III system senses that the wrong
key has been inserted into the ignition, it shuts down
the vehicle’s starter and fuel systems. The starter will not
work and fuel will stop flowing to the engine. If
someone tries to start the vehicle again with the wrong
key, the vehicle will not start. Anyone using a
trial-and-error method to start the vehicle will be
discouraged to do so because of the high number of
electrical key codes.

2-20

When trying to start the vehicle, if the engine does not
start and the STARTING DISABLED DUE TO THEFT
SYSTEM warning message on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) comes on, the key may have a damaged
transponder. Turn the ignition off and try again.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to
be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time,
you may also want to check the fuse. See Fuses
and Circuit Breakers on page 5-112. If the engine still
does not start with the other key, the vehicle needs
service. If the vehicle does start, the first key may be
faulty. See your dealer who can service the
PASS-Key® III to have a new key made. In an
emergency, contact Roadside Assistance. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 7-6 for more information.
It is possible for the PASS-Key® III decoder to accept
the transponder value of a new or replacement key. Up
to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle. If all
the programmed keys are lost or do not operate,
see your GM dealer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III to have keys made and programmed to
the system.
Canadian Owners: If all the keys are lost or damaged,
only a GM dealer can service PASS-Key® III to have
new keys made and programmed to the system.

The following procedure is for programming a new or
replacement key when you have at least one already
programmed key. To program the new key do the
following:
1. Verify that the new key has PK3 stamped on it.
2. Insert the master key in the ignition and start
the engine. If the engine will not start, see your
dealer for service.
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to OFF,
and remove the key.
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to RUN
within five seconds of removing the original key.
5. The STARTING DISABLED DUE TO THEFT
SYSTEM warning message on the DIC will turn off,
once the key has been programmed. It may not be
apparent that the SERVICE THEFT SYSTEM
warning message went on due to how quickly the key
is programmed.
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 if additional keys are to
be programmed.
If the STARTING DISABLED DUE TO THEFT SYSTEM
warning message appears and stays on the DIC while the
vehicle is being driven, the engine will be able to be
restarted if it is turned off. Your PASS-Key® III system,
however, is not working properly and must be serviced by
your dealer. The vehicle is not protected by the
PASS-Key® III system at this time. If the PASS-Key® III
key is lost or stolen, see your dealer or a locksmith who
can service PASS-Key® III to have a new key made.

Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:

• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake, or slow, the vehicle.

• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time your new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new
linings can mean premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline
every time you get new brake linings.

• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing a
Trailer on page 4-40 for the trailer towing
capabilities of your vehicle and more
information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.

2-21

Ignition Positions
The ignition switch is located on the instrument panel, to
the right of the steering column.
There are four different
positions. Insert the
key in the ignition and
turn it to the right for
each position.

ACC (ACCESSORY): This position allows things like
the radio and windshield wipers to operate while
the engine is off.

R (RUN):

This position is where the key returns to
after the vehicle is started. With the engine off, the
RUN position displays some of the warning and
indicator lights.

/ (START): This position starts the engine. Let go of
the key when the engine starts. The key will return
to the RUN for normal driving.
A continuous warning chime will sound and a KEY IN
IGNITION message will display on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) if the key is turned to OFF or ACC and
the driver’s door is opened.

9 (OFF):

This position locks the ignition, steering
wheel and transaxle. It is a theft-deterrent feature. This is
the only position from which the key can be removed.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break the
key. Use the correct key and turn the key only with
your hand. Make sure the key is all the way in. If
it is, turn the steering wheel left and right while you
turn the key hard. If none of this works, then
your vehicle needs service.

2-22

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
If the vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP),
certain features will continue to operate for up to
10 minutes after the ignition key is turned to OFF unless
a door is opened.

Starting the Engine
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
The engine will not start in any other position — that is
a safety feature. To restart when you are already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehicle
moving could damage the transaxle. Shift into
PARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as the
engine gets warm.
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining
your battery or damaging your starter.
2. If the engine does not start within 10 seconds, hold
your key in START for about 10 seconds at a time
until the engine starts. Wait about 15 seconds
between each try.

When your engine has run for about 10 seconds to
warm up, your vehicle is ready to be driven. Do
not race your engine when it is cold.
If the weather is below freezing (32°F or 0°C), let
the engine run for a few minutes to warm up.
3. If your engine still will not start, or starts but then
stops, it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds. If the vehicle starts
briefly but then stops again, do the same
thing. This time keep the pedal down for five or
six seconds to clear the extra gasoline from
the engine. After waiting about 15 seconds, repeat
the normal starting procedure.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly. Any resulting damage
would not be covered by your vehicle’s warranty.

2-23

Engine Coolant Heater
The vehicle may be equipped with an engine coolant
heater. In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the
engine coolant heater can help. The vehicle will start
easier and get better fuel economy during engine
warm-up. Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged
in a minimum of four hours prior to starting the
vehicle. At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the
coolant heater is not required. Your vehicle may
also have an internal thermostat in the plug end of the
cord. This will prevent operation of the engine coolant
heater when the temperature is at or above 0°F (−18°C)
as noted on the cord.

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The
cord is located above the engine air cleaner/filter.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for more information on location.
3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded 110-volt
AC outlet.

2-24

{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before, making sure to
keep it away from moving engine parts. If this is not
done, the cord could be damaged.
How long should the coolant heater be kept plugged in?
The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil that is in the vehicle, and some other things.
Instead of trying to list everything here, we ask that
you contact your dealer in the area where the vehicle will
be parked. The dealer can give you the best advice
for that particular area.

Displacement on Demand™ (DoD™)
(5.3L Engine)
Your vehicle’s engine may be equipped with
Displacement on Demand™ (DoD™). This system
allows the engine to operate on either all or half of its
cylinders, depending on your driving conditions.

Automatic Transaxle Operation
The shift lever for the automatic transaxle is located on
the console between the seats.
Maximum engine speed is limited when the vehicle is in
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) to protect driveline
components from improper operation.

When less power is required, such as cruising at a
constant vehicle speed, the system will operate in the
half cylinder mode, allowing your vehicle to achieve
better fuel economy. When greater power demands are
required, such as accelerating from a stop, passing,
or merging onto a freeway, the system will maintain
full-cylinder operation.
When greater power demands are required, such as
accelerating from a stop, passing, or merging onto
a freeway, the system will maintain eight-cylinder
operation. When less power is required, such a
cruising at a constant vehicle speed, the system will
automatically enable the four-cylinder mode, allowing
your vehicle to achieve better fuel economy.

There are several different
positions for the shift lever.

3800 V6 Engine

2-25

PARK (P): This position locks the front wheels. It is the
best position to use when the engine is started
because the vehicle cannot move easily.

{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P). See Shifting Into Park (P) on
page 2-31. If you are pulling a trailer, see
Towing a Trailer on page 4-40.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before
starting the engine. The vehicle has an automatic
transaxle shift lock control system.

2-26

The regular brakes must be fully applied and the shift
control button, located on the front of the shift lever,
must be pressed before the vehicle can be shifted from
PARK (P) when the ignition is in RUN. If the vehicle
cannot be shifted out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the
shift lever by pushing it all the way into PARK (P)
while keeping the brake pedal pushed down. Release
the shift lever button. Then move the shift lever out
of PARK (P), being sure to press the shift lever button.
See Shifting Out of Park (P) on page 2-32.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transaxle. The
repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Shift
to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is stopped.
To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, ice
or sand without damaging the transaxle, see If Your
Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on
page 4-32.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when the vehicle is
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when the vehicle is being towed.

{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
while the engine is running at high speed may
damage the transaxle. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speeds when shifting your vehicle.
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): This position is for
normal driving. If the vehicle needs more power
for passing, and it is:

• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.

The vehicle will shift down to the next gear and have
more power.
Notice: If your vehicle seems to start up rather
slowly or not shift gears when you go faster, and
you continue to drive your vehicle that way, you
could damage the transaxle. Have your vehicle
serviced right away. You can drive in SECOND (2)
when you are driving less than 35 mph (55 km/h) and
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) for higher speeds
until then.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving,
but it offers more power and lower fuel economy than
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D).
Here are some times THIRD (3) could be used instead
of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D):

• When driving on hilly, winding roads.
• When towing a trailer, so there is less shifting
between gears.

• When going down a steep hill.
• When driving in non-highway scenarios (i.e. city
streets, etc.).

• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator pedal all the way down.

2-27

SECOND (2): This position gives the vehicle more
power but lower fuel economy than THIRD (3).
SECOND (2) can be used on hills. It can help control
the vehicle’s speed as it goes down steep mountain
roads, but then you would also want to use the brakes
off and on.

Performance Shifting with TAP-Shift®

Notice: Driving in SECOND (2) for more than
25 miles (40 km) or at speeds over 55 mph (90 km/h),
can cause damage to your engine and/or transaxle.
Also, shifting into SECOND (2) at speeds above
65 mph (105 km/h) can cause damage. Drive
in AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) instead of
SECOND (2).

To fully use this feature, do the following:

FIRST (1): This position gives the vehicle even more
power but lower fuel economy than SECOND (2). It can
be used on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud.
If the shift lever is moved to FIRST (1), the transaxle
will not shift into first gear until the vehicle is going
slowly enough.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transaxle. If you are stuck,
do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes, or parking brake to hold the
vehicle in place.

2-28

If the vehicle is equipped with the 3800 V6
Supercharged engine or the 5.3L V8 engine, your
vehicle may have this feature. It allows you to change
gears similar to a manual transaxle.
1. The MANUAL (M) position can be selected while
the vehicle is moving. The current transaxle
position will continue to be displayed on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) and Head-Up
Display (HUD), if equipped.
2. Move the shift lever to
the MANUAL (M).

3. The paddles are
located on the steering
wheel. They are
used to up-shift or
down-shift the
transaxle.

The up-shift light will only appear in the instrument
panel cluster if the HUD is off or if the vehicle does
not have HUD.
This prompt to up-shift, as needed, will be given
throughout acceleration. If up-shifting does not occur
when prompted, the vehicle speed will be limited
to protect the engine.
The gear position will display on the DIC and HUD, if
equipped, when in manual mode.

4. Push either paddle once to up-shift to the next
gear. Pull either paddle once to down-shift to
the next gear.
The vehicle will begin moving in first gear upon
acceleration. For better control in icy or slippery
conditions, the vehicle may start out in SECOND (2),
rather than FIRST (1). This will only occur if you
have “tapped up” to second gear.
The up-shift light on the
instrument panel cluster, or
the up-shift symbol on
the HUD, if equipped, is
given as a prompt to
use the TAP-Shift® paddle.

Pressing the accelerator while driving in the highest
gear (FOURTH (4)) between 20 mph (32 km/h)
and 50 mph (80 km/h), will make the transaxle
automatically downshift. As your speed gets closer to
50 mph (80 km/h), you will need to increase accelerator
pedal travel to get the vehicle to downshift. At 50 mph
(80 km/h), even with the accelerator fully depressed, the
transaxle will always remain in FOURTH (4). The
transaxle will also automatically downshift as the vehicle
decelerates and comes to a stop.
If a paddle is pushed or pulled and the vehicle cannot
respond to a transaxle gear change, a chime will sound.
The system will not allow either an up-shift or a
down-shift if the vehicle speed is too fast or too slow,
nor will it allow a start from THIRD (3) or higher gear.

For more information, see Up-Shift Light on page 3-42.
2-29

Parking Brake
The parking brake is
located to the left of the
brake pedal near the
driver’s door. To set the
parking brake, hold
the regular brake pedal
down with the right
foot. Push down on the
parking brake pedal,
with the left foot.

To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down with the right foot and push the parking
brake pedal with the left foot. When the left foot is lifted,
the parking brake pedal will lift to the released position.

2-30

A warning chime will sound if the parking brake is set,
the ignition is on, and the shift lever is not in PARK (P)
or NEUTRAL (N).
The brake light will also appear on the instrument panel
cluster when the parking brake is set. It will stay on if
the parking brake does not release fully.
The PARKING BRAKE ON message will also appear in
the Driver Information Center (DIC) when the parking
brake is set. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 3-72 for more information.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
If the vehicle is towing a trailer and parked on a hill, see
Towing a Trailer on page 4-40. That section shows
what to do first to keep the trailer from moving.

Shifting Into Park (P)

{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. If
you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground, use
the steps that follow. If you are pulling a trailer,
see Towing a Trailer on page 4-40.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by holding in the
button on the shift lever and pushing the shift lever
all the way toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to OFF.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running

{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
have moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the
regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move
the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pushing
the button.
If you can, it means that the shift lever was not fully
locked in PARK (P).

2-31

Torque Lock

Shifting Out of Park (P)

If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in
the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the shift
lever out of PARK (P). This is called torque lock.
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then
shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into Park (P)
on page 2-31.

The vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lock control
system which locks the shift lever in PARK (P) when
the ignition is in OFF. In addition, the regular brakes
must be fully applied before shifting from PARK (P) while
the ignition is in RUN. See Automatic Transaxle
Operation on page 2-25.

When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push your vehicle a little uphill to take some of
the pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle,
so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).

If the vehicle cannot be shifted out of PARK (P), ease
pressure on the shift lever and push the shift lever all the
way up into PARK (P) as brake application is maintained.
Then move the shift lever into the desired gear.
If the brake pedal is held down but the vehicle still
cannot be shifted out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the key to ACC.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift the transaxle to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the desired
transaxle gear.
5. Have the system fixed as soon as possible.

2-32

Parking Over Things That Burn

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other
things that can burn.

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot
see or smell. It can cause unconsciousness
and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over
road debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

2-33

Running the Engine While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
Engine Exhaust on page 2-33.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. See
Winter Driving on page 4-28.

2-34

{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-31.
If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling a
trailer, also see Towing a Trailer on page 4-40.

Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror
with OnStar®

The mirror also has a dual display in the upper right
corner of the mirror that shows the compass reading and
the outside temperature.

Y On/Off: Press this button to operate the automatic
dimming, compass and temperature features.

Your vehicle has this feature located at the bottom of
the mirror, to change the mirror from the day to the night
position. To reduce the glare of headlamps from
behind, turn the control counterclockwise. To return the
mirror to the day position, turn the control clockwise.

Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation

There are also three OnStar® buttons located at
the bottom of the mirror face. See your dealer for more
information on the system and how to subscribe to
OnStar®. See OnStar® System on page 2-38 for more
information about the services OnStar® provides.

If the automatic dimming function is off, press and hold
the on/off button for four seconds to manually turn
the system back on.

The automatic dimming mirror function is turned on each
time the ignition is started. A light near the on/off button
will come on to indicate the automatic dimming is on.

Temperature and Compass Display

Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror with Compass and
Temperature Display

Press the on/off button, located in the center, to cycle
between °F, °C and off. If the display reads CAL,
the compass needs to be calibrated. For more
information, see “Compass Calibration” later in
this section.

If the vehicle has this feature, the automatic dimming
mirror automatically dims to the proper level to minimize
glare at night from lights behind your vehicle.

If an abnormal temperature reading is displayed for an
extended period of time, please consult your dealer.
Under certain circumstances, a delay in updating
the temperature is normal.

2-35

Compass Variance
Compass variance is the difference between earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. If not
adjusted to account for compass variance, the mirror’s
compass could give false readings. The mirror is
set in zone eight upon leaving the factory. It will be
necessary to adjust the compass to compensate
for compass variance if you live outside zone eight.
Under certain circumstances, as during a long distance
cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for
compass variance.
To adjust for compass variance:
1. Find the current location and variance zone number
on the following zone map.
2. Press and hold the on/off button for five seconds
until the word ZONE appears in the display. The
compass is now in zone mode.

2-36

3. Press and release the on/off button within
five seconds until the new zone number appears in
the display. The display will show a compass
direction within a few seconds.

Compass Calibration
The compass may need calibration if one of the
following occurs:

• If CAL is displayed while driving in the vehicle.
• After approximately five seconds, the display does

Outside Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls
are located near the
driver’s window, on the
driver’s door armrest.

not show a compass heading (N for North, for
example), there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may
be caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic
note pad holder, or a similar magnetic item.

• The compass does not display the correct heading
and the compass zone variance is set correctly.
In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in the
mirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed, push
in the on/off button for approximately eight seconds
or until CAL is displayed.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in
circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display
reads a direction.

Cleaning the Mirror
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.

Move the top control to the left to adjust the driver’s
side outside mirror. Move the control to the right
to adjust the passenger’s side mirror. The center
position turns the power control off and will not allow the
mirrors to move if the control pad is touched.
The round control pad adjusts the angle of the selected
outside mirror. Press the arrows on the control pad
to adjust the angle of the mirror. Adjust each mirror so
that the sides and the area behind the vehicle can
be seen.

2-37

Outside Convex Mirror

OnStar® System

{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
The passenger’s outside rearview mirror is convex. The
surface is curved so more area can be seen from the
driver’s seat. It also make things look farther away than
they really are.

2-38

OnStar® uses global positioning system (GPS) satellite
technology, wireless communications, and live
advisors to provide you with a wide range of safety,
security, information, and convenience services. If your
airbags deploy, the system is designed to make an
automatic call to OnStar® Emergency where we
can request emergency services be sent to your
location. If you lock your keys in the car, call OnStar® at
1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal to
unlock your doors. If you need roadside assistance,
press the OnStar® button and they will get you the help
you need.

A complete OnStar® User’s Guide and the Terms and
Conditions of the OnStar® Subscription Service
Agreement are included in the vehicle’s glove box
literature. For more information, visit www.onstar.com or
www.onstar.ca. Contact OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827), or press the OnStar® button to speak
to an OnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
Terms and conditions of the Subscription Service
Agreement can be found at www.onstar.com or
www.onstar.ca.

OnStar® Services
For new vehicles equipped with OnStar®, the Safe and
Sound Plan is included for one year from the date of
purchase. You can extend this plan beyond the
first year, or upgrade to the Directions and Connections®
Plan to meet your needs. For more information, press
the OnStar® button to speak to an advisor.

Safe and Sound Plan
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Tracking
• AccidentAssist
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• Remote Diagnostics
• Online Concierge
Directions and Connections® Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• Driving Directions
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services

2-39

OnStar® Personal Calling
As an OnStar® subscriber, the Personal Calling
capability allows you to make hands-free calls using a
wireless system that is integrated into the vehicle.
Calls can be placed nationwide using simple voice
commands with no additional contracts and no additional
roaming charges. To find out more about OnStar®
Personal Calling, refer to the OnStar® User’s Guide in
the vehicle’s glove box, visit www.onstar.com or
www.onstar.ca, or speak to an OnStar® advisor by
pressing the OnStar® button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827).

OnStar® Virtual Advisor
Your vehicle may have Virtual Advisor. It is a feature of
OnStar® Personal Calling that uses minutes to access
weather, local traffic reports, and stock quotes. By
pressing the phone button and giving a few simple voice
commands, you can browse through the various
topics. Customize your information profile at
www.myonstar.com. See the OnStar® User’s Guide for
more information.

2-40

OnStar® Steering Wheel Controls
Your vehicle may be
equipped with a Talk/Mute
button that can be used to
interact with OnStar®. See
the Audio Steering Wheel
Control section for your
specific vehicle operation.
When calling into voice mail systems, or to dial directory
numbers, press this button once, wait for the response,
say the number(s) to be dialed, wait for the number(s)
to be repeated and then say “dial”. See the OnStar®
User’s Guide for more information.

Storage Areas
Glove Box
Open the glove box by lifting up on the lever. Close the
glove box with a firm push.

Cupholder(s)

Cupholder Removal

There are two cupholders in the front of the
center console.

Cupholder Installation

Remove the rear cupholder by pulling it from the
console.

Your vehicle may also have a rear cupholder that can
be installed by aligning it to the console and snapping it
into place.

2-41

Overhead Console

Front Seat Storage Net
The overhead console has
two reading lamps. Press
the sides of each lens
to turn the reading lamps
on or off.

If the vehicle has a fold-flat front passenger seat, a
storage net is attached to the seatback. It cannot
be removed from the seat.

Center Console Storage Area
To open the armrest storage area, pull up on the latch
located on the front drivers side of the storage area.
The storage area may have a cassette/compact
disc holder.

Assist Handles
If the vehicle does not have an overhead console, it will
have a dome light located in the front of the headliner.

Sunglasses Storage Compartment
Your vehicle may have a storage compartment located
to the rear on the overhead console. To open the
sunglasses storage compartment, press the release
latch forward and pull the compartment down.

2-42

The vehicle has lighted assist handles located above
the rear doors. They can be used to help passengers
enter and exit the vehicle.
The lamps on the handles will come on automatically
when a door is opened, and turn off when the door is
closed. If the lamps have grooves on each lens, they can
manually be turned on or off by pressing the sides.
Your vehicle may have a rear coat hook available under
the rear assist handle on each side of the vehicle.

Convenience Net
The vehicle may have a convenience net located on the
back wall of the trunk.
Put small loads, like grocery bags, behind the net. It can
help keep them from falling over.
The net is not for larger, heavier loads. Store those in
the trunk as far forward as possible.
Unhook the net so that it will lie flat when not in use.

Sunroof
If the vehicle has a sunroof, it includes a sliding glass
panel and a sunshade.

The switch works only while the ignition is on, or in
ACC, or Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is on. See
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-22.
Vent: Open the sunshade by hand. Push the switch
toward the rear of the vehicle once and the sunroof
will open to the vent position. Push the switch forward
to close.
Open/Express-Open: Push the switch toward the rear
of the vehicle a second time and the sunroof will
open the remainder of the way. The sunshade will open
with the sunroof if the switch is pushed toward the
rear of the vehicle twice.
Close: Push and hold the front of the switch until the
sunroof motor stops. The sunshade must be closed
by hand.

The switch to control the
sunroof is located in the
headliner.

2-43

✍ NOTES

2-44

Section 3

Instrument Panel

Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6
Other Warning Devices ...................................3-6
Horn .............................................................3-6
Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-6
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-7
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-8
Flash-to-Pass .................................................3-9
Windshield Wiper Lever ...................................3-9
Cruise Control ..............................................3-11
Exterior Lamps .............................................3-15
Headlamps on Reminder ................................3-15
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................3-16
Fog Lamps ..................................................3-17
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ........................3-17
Interior Lamps ..............................................3-17
Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-18
Courtesy Lamps ...........................................3-18
Entry Lighting ...............................................3-18
Delayed Entry Lighting ...................................3-19
Delayed Exit Lighting .....................................3-19
Front Reading Lamps ....................................3-20
Overhead Console Reading Lamps .................3-20

Rear Assist Handle Reading Lamps ................3-20
Battery Run-Down Protection ..........................3-20
Head-Up Display (HUD) .................................3-21
Accessory Power Outlet(s) .............................3-24
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ......................3-25
Climate Controls ............................................3-26
Climate Control System .................................3-26
Dual Automatic Climate Control System ...........3-29
Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-33
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ...................3-33
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-35
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-36
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-37
Tachometer .................................................3-37
Safety Belt Reminder Light .............................3-38
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light .............3-38
Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-39
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ...................3-40
Up-Shift Light ...............................................3-42
Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-42
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-44
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light ....3-45
Enhanced Traction System Warning Light .........3-45

3-1

Section 3

Instrument Panel

Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light ......3-46
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-46
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-47
Oil Pressure Light .........................................3-50
Fog Lamp Light ............................................3-50
Cruise Control Light ......................................3-51
Highbeam On Light .......................................3-51
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-51
Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-52
DIC Controls and Displays (Base Level DIC) ....3-52
DIC Controls and Displays (Uplevel DIC
with Trip Computer) ...................................3-60
DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-72

3-2

Audio System(s) .............................................3-94
Setting the Time ...........................................3-96
Radio with CD (Base Level) ...........................3-96
Radio with CD (MP3) ..................................3-107
Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................3-123
Navigation/Radio System ..............................3-139
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................3-139
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ......................3-139
Radio Reception .........................................3-140
Care of Your CDs .......................................3-141
Care of the CD Player .................................3-141
Backglass Antenna ......................................3-141
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............3-142
Chime Level Adjustment ...............................3-142

✍ NOTES

3-3

Instrument Panel Overview

3-4

The main components of the instrument panel are the following:
A. Side Window Defogger Outlets. See Outlet
Adjustment on page 3-33.
B. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-33.
C. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever and Cruise Controls.
See Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7
and Cruise Control on page 3-11.
D. TAP-Shift® Control (If Equipped). See Automatic
Transaxle Operation on page 2-25.
E. Hazard Warning Flashers Button. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 3-6.
F. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel
Cluster on page 3-36.
G. Windshield Wiper Lever. See Windshield Wiper
Lever on page 3-9.
H. Ignition. See Ignition Positions on page 2-22.
I. Driver Information Center (DIC). See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on page 3-52.
J. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-94.
K. Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped).
See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-139.

L. Hood Release. See Hood Release on page 5-11.
M. Tilt Steering Wheel Lever, on Steering Column. See
Tilt Wheel on page 3-6.
N. Interior Lamps Brightness Control. See Interior
Lamps on page 3-17.
O. Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator. See Passenger
Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-40.
P. Climate Controls. See Climate Control System on
page 3-26.
Q. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transaxle Operation on
page 2-25.
R. Traction Control Button. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 4-9.
S. Head Up Display (HUD) Control. See Head-Up
Display (HUD) on page 3-21.
T. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-40.
U. Instrument Panel Fuse Block. See Instrument Panel
Fuse Block on page 5-112.

3-5

Hazard Warning Flashers

Horn

Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.

Press the vehicle’s steering wheel pad to sound
the horn.

The hazard warning
flasher button is located on
top of the steering
column.

Tilt Wheel
A tilt wheel enables the position of the steering wheel to
be adjusted. The lever that lets the steering wheel tilt
is located on the outboard side of the steering column.

Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key is not in
the ignition.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals will not work.

Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
3-6

To tilt the steering wheel, hold it and pull the lever.
Move the steering wheel to a comfortable driving
position and release the lever to lock it into place.
Tilt the steering wheel to the highest position to give
more room when exiting and entering the vehicle.

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

Turn and Lane-Change Signals
To signal a turn, move the turn signal lever located on
the left side of the steering column all the way up
or down. The lever returns automatically when the turn
is complete.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.

The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
• G Turn and Lane-Change Signals. See Turn and
Lane-Change Signals on page 3-7.
• 3 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8.
• - Fog Lamps. See Fog Lamps on page 3-17.
• Flash-to-Pass Feature. See Flash-to-Pass on
page 3-9.
• I Cruise Control. See Cruise Control on
page 3-11.
• P Exterior Lamps Control. See Exterior Lamps on
page 3-15.

If the vehicle is equipped with the Head-Up-Display
(HUD), a right or left turn signal will appear in the HUD
area when making turns or lane changes. See
Head-Up Display (HUD) on page 3-21 for more
information.
Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash to
signal a lane change. Hold it there until the lane
change is complete. The lever returns to its original
position when it is released.

3-7

Arrows that flash rapidly when signaling for a turn or
lane change may be caused by a burned-out signal bulb.
Other drivers will not see the signal.
Replace burned-out bulbs to help avoid possible
accidents. See Replacement Bulbs on page 5-59, Front
Turn Signal, Parking and Fog Lamps on page 5-56,
and Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps on
page 5-57. Also, check the fuse for burned-out bulbs if a
turn signal arrow fails to work when signaling a turn.
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-112 for
location information.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Push forward on the exterior lamps control lever to
change the headlamps from low to high-beam. Pull the
lever back and then release it to change from high
to low-beam.
This symbol appears on
the instrument panel cluster
when the high-beam
headlamps are on.

Turn Signal On Chime
If the turn signal is left on for more than 0.75 of a mile
(1.21 km), a warning chime will sound and the TURN
SIGNAL ON warning message will appear on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) display. See “Turn Signal
On” under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-72.

3-8

When the high-beam headlamps are on, the fog lamps
will not be on. If the vehicle is equipped with the
Head-Up-Display (HUD) an arrow will appear in the
HUD area indicating that the high-beams are on. See
Head-Up Display (HUD) on page 3-21 for more
information.

Flash-to-Pass
This feature allows the use of the high-beam headlamps
to signal the driver in front of you that you want to pass.

Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. A
circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.

Pull and hold the exterior lamps control lever to use this
feature. When this is done, the following will occur:

• The high-beam headlamps will turn on, while
the headlamps are off, in low-beam, or in Daytime
Running Lamps (DRL) mode. They will stay on
as long as the lever is held in this position. Release
the lever to turn them off.

• The headlamps will switch to low beam if the
headlamps had been in the high-beam mode.
To return to high-beam, push the lever.
If the vehicle is equipped with the Head-Up
Display (HUD), an arrow will appear on the display to
indicate that the high beams are on.

N(Windshield Wipers):

Windshield Wiper Lever

9 (Off): Lower the lever to its original position to turn
the wipers off.

Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they are frozen to the windshield,
gently loosen or thaw them. Damaged wiper blades may
not clear the windshield well, making it harder to see and
drive safely. If the blades do become damaged, install
new blades or blade inserts. For more information, see
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on page 5-60.

The lever with this symbol,
located on the right side of the steering column,
operates the windshield wipers.

& (Delay):

Push the lever up once to this position to
set a delay between wiping cycles. Turn the delay
adjustment band to set the length of the delay.

3-9

x (Delay Adjustment):

Turn the band, located on
the left of the windshield wiper lever, to set the length of
the delay between wiper cycles when using the delay
feature. There are five delay adjustment settings.
Turn the band up to make the delays shorter in between
wiper cycles. Turn the band down to make the delays
longer between wiper cycles. The windshield wiper lever
must be in delay for this feature to work.

6 (Low Speed): Push the lever up to the second
position for steady wiping cycles at a slow speed.

Windshield Washer

{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.

1 (High Speed): Push the lever up to the third
position for steady wiping cycles at a high speed.

The windshield washer button is located at the end of
the windshield wiper lever.

7 (Mist):

K (Washer Fluid):

About 30 seconds after the wipers are on, the
headlamps, taillamps, and instrument panel lighting will
come on, and the Driver Information Center (DIC)
back lighting will decrease to the night time mode. About
ten seconds after the wipers are turned off, all the
lamps will go back to the AUTO (Automatic) mode. See
Exterior Lamps on page 3-15.

If the vehicle is low on washer fluid, the LOW WASHER
FLUID message will appear on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) display. See “LOW WASHER FLUID”
under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-72 for
more information.

For a single wiping cycle, push the
lever down once and let go. The wipers will stop after
one cycle. For additional cycles, hold the lever down.

3-10

Press this button to activate the
washer fluid to spray onto the windshield. The wipers
will run for a few cycles to clear the windshield. For more
wash cycles, press and hold the button.

Cruise Control

9(Off): This position
turns the system off.

{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause needless wheel spinning,
and you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.

R(On):

This position activates the system.

+ (Resume/Accelerate): Move the lever to this symbol
to make the vehicle accelerate or resume to a
previously set speed.

T(Set):

Press this button to set the speed.

With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
about 25 mph (40 km/h).

3-11

Cruise control will not work if your parking brake is set,
or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.

{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause needless wheel spinning,
and you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system (if equipped) begins to limit wheel spin,
the cruise control will automatically disengage. See
Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-9. When road
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may
turn cruise control back on.

3-12

Setting Cruise Control

{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.

1. Move the cruise control switch to on.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press in the set button at the end of the lever and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
This symbol, along with
the CRUISE SET
message, will briefly
appear in the Driver
Information Center (DIC)
when the cruise
control is set.

The CRUISE SET message will also appear
briefly on the Head-Up Display (HUD), if equipped,
when the cruise control lever is pushed to the minus
(set/coast/decelerate) or the plus (resume/accelerate)
positions.
A cruise control light will also appear on the instrument
panel cluster when the cruise control is on. This light
will disappear when the brakes are applied or the cruise
control is cancelled. It will reappear when the set
cruise speed is resumed. The light will go out when the
cruise control is turned off. See Cruise Control Light
on page 3-51.

Resuming a Set Speed
Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, you
can move the cruise control switch briefly from on to
resume/accelerate.
Your vehicle will go right back up to your chosen speed
and stay there.
If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate the vehicle
will keep going faster until you release the switch or
apply the brake. So unless you want to go faster, don’t
hold the switch at resume/accelerate.

Increasing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:

• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press the set button at the end of the lever,
then release the button and the accelerator
pedal. You’ll now cruise at the higher speed. If the
accelerator pedal is held longer than 60 seconds,
cruise control will turn off.

• Move the cruise switch from on to
resume/accelerate. Hold it there until you get up to
the speed you want, and then release the switch.
To increase your speed in very small amounts,
move the switch briefly to resume/accelerate. Each
time you do this, your vehicle will go about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
The acceleration feature will only work after the cruise
control speed has been set by pushing the cruise control
set button.

3-13

Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to reduce the vehicle’s speed while
using cruise control:

• Press and hold the set button until you reach the
lower speed you want, then release it.

• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press
the set button. Each time you do this your vehicle
will slow down approximately one mph (1.6 km/h).

Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle’s
speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the
vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed
set earlier.

Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well the cruise control will work on hills depends
upon the vehicle’s speed, its load, and the steepness of
the hills. When going up steep hills, the accelerator
pedal might have to be used in order to maintain
the vehicle’s speed. When going downhill, the brakes
might have to be applied, or the transaxle might have to
be shifted to a lower gear to keep the vehicle’s speed
down. Doing either of these things will take the
vehicle out of cruise. It may be better not to use the
cruise control if the brakes constantly have to be
applied, or the vehicle continuously needs to be shifted
to a lower gear.

Ending Cruise Control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:

• Step lightly on the brake pedal
• Move the cruise control switch to off
Erasing Speed Memory
When the cruise control or the ignition is turned off, the
cruise control set speed memory is erased.

3-14

Exterior Lamps

To reset to AUTO mode turn the control to exterior
lamps and then back to AUTO. Automatic mode will also
reset when your vehicle is turned off and then back
on again when the control is left in the AUTO position.

; (Parking Lamp): Turning the band to this position
turns on the parking lamps together with the following:
•
•
•
•
The exterior lamp control is located to the left of the
steering wheel on the multifunction lever.

O (Exterior Lamp Control):

Turn the band with this
symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps.

Sidemarker Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights

The parking brake indicator light will come on and stay
on when the parking lamps are on with the engine
off and the ignition to ACC.

5 (Headlamps):

The exterior lamp band has four positions:

Turning the control to this position
turns on the headlamps, together with the previously
listed lamps and lights.

O (Off): Turning the band to this position turns off
all lamps.

Headlamps on Reminder

AUTO (Automatic): Turning the band to this position
sets the exterior lamps in automatic mode. AUTO mode
will turn the exterior lamps on and off depending on
how much light is available outside the vehicle.

A warning chime will sound if the vehicle’s ignition is off
and the driver’s door is opened when the exterior
lamp control is left on in either the headlamp or parking
lamp position.

To override AUTO mode, turn the control to off.
3-15

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Daytime running
lamps are required to function at all times on all
vehicles first sold in Canada.

When it is dark enough outside, the DRL will turn off
and the vehicle’s headlamps and parking lamps will turn
on. The other lamps that come on with the headlamps
will also come on.
When it is bright enough outside, the headlamps will go
off and the DRL will come on.
To idle the vehicle with the DRL off, turn the exterior
lamp control off and then do one of the following:

A light sensor on top of the instrument panel makes the
DRL work, so be sure it is not covered.

• Turn the exterior lamp control to the parking

The DRL system will make the low-beam headlamps
come on at reduced brightness when the following
conditions are met:

• Turn the exterior lamp control to the

• The ignition is on.
• The exterior lamps control is off.
• The parking brake is released.
While the DRL are on, only the vehicle’s low-beam
headlamps will be on at reduced brightness. The turn
signal, taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps will not be
on. The instrument panel cluster will not be lit up either.

lamp position.
headlamp position.

• Turn the exterior lamp control from AUTO to off and
back to AUTO.
This feature is not available for vehicles first sold
in Canada.
To turn off the automatic headlamp feature when it is
dark outside, move the exterior lamp control to the
parking lamp position. The parking lamps will remain
illuminated and the headlamps will turn off. The
fog lamps will also go on if they were on previously.
As with any vehicle, the regular headlamp system
should be turned on when needed.

3-16

Fog Lamps

Exterior Lighting Battery Saver

If equipped, fog lamps provide brighter roadway lighting
for better vision in foggy or misty conditions.

If the parking lamps or headlamps have been left on
after the ignition has been turned to off, the exterior
lamps will turn off after approximately 10 minutes. This
protects the battery from being drained.

- (Fog Lamps): Turn the second band on the
exterior lamps control lever to this position to turn the
fog lamps on. The band will return to its original position.
This symbol appears on
the instrument panel
cluster when the fog
lamps are on.

If the lamps need to be left on for more than
10 minutes, use the exterior lamp control to turn the
lamps back on.

Interior Lamps
The interior lamps can be controlled, or automatically
turn on or off under certain conditions. They are
explained in the following text.

To turn the fog lamps off, turn the band up to the fog
lamp symbol and release it. The band will return
to its original position. If the high-beam headlamps are
on, the fog lamps will turn off. The fog lamps will go
on again when the low-beam headlamps are turned
back on.
The parking lamps must be on for the fog lamps
to work.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.

3-17

Instrument Panel Brightness

Entry Lighting

This feature controls the brightness of the instrument
panel lights.

The entry lighting feature turns the interior lights on
before anyone enters the vehicle. The interior lamps will
come on for 40 seconds when the doors are unlocked
using the remote keyless entry transmitter and the
ignition is in OFF. After 40 seconds have elapsed, the
interior lamps will slowly fade out. The lamps will
fade out before 40 seconds have elapsed if one of the
following is done:

The interior lamps
control is located on the
instrument panel, to the left
of the steering column.

• Lock all doors using the remote keyless entry
transmitter.

• Lock the doors using the power door lock switch.

Turn the control to adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel lights.

Courtesy Lamps
When a door is opened, the courtesy lamps will
automatically come on. These lamps will also come on
when the interior lamps control is fully turned clockwise.

3-18

When any door is opened, entry lighting is cancelled.
The interior lamps will stay on while any door is opened
and slowly fade out when all doors are closed. The
interior lamps may stay on for up to 25 seconds after all
doors have been closed if they have not been locked.

Delayed Entry Lighting

Delayed Exit Lighting

The delayed lighting feature will continue to light the
interior of the vehicle for 25 seconds after all the doors
have been closed. Delayed lighting will not occur
while the ignition is in RUN or ACC. After 25 seconds
have elapsed, the interior lamps will slowly fade out. The
lamps will fade out before the 25 seconds have
elapsed if one of the following is done:

For exiting the vehicle at night, the vehicle is equipped
with the delayed exit lighting feature. After the key
is removed from the ignition, the interior lamps will light
for up the amount of seconds set in the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See “Personal Programming
Mode Screens” under DIC Controls and Displays
(Base Level DIC) on page 3-52 or DIC Controls and
Displays (Uplevel DIC with Trip Computer) on
page 3-60. After the set time has elapsed, the interior
lamps will slowly fade. The lamps will fade before the set
time has elapsed if one of the following is done:
• The ignition is turned to RUN or ACC.
• The doors are locked using the remote keyless
entry transmitter.
• The doors are locked using the power door
lock switch.
When any door is opened, delayed exit lighting is
cancelled. The interior lamps will stay on while any door
is opened and will slowly fade out when all the doors
are closed. The interior lamps will stay on for the
set time after all the doors have been closed if they
have not been locked.
To turn the delayed exit lighting feature off or on, see
“Personal Programming Mode Screens” under DIC
Controls and Displays (Base Level DIC) on page 3-52
or DIC Controls and Displays (Uplevel DIC with Trip
Computer) on page 3-60.

• The ignition is turned to RUN or ACC.
• The doors are locked using the remote keyless
entry transmitter.

• The doors are locked using the power door
lock switch.
To turn the delayed lighting feature off or on, see
“Personal Programming Modes” under DIC Controls and
Displays (Base Level DIC) on page 3-52 or DIC
Controls and Displays (Uplevel DIC with Trip Computer)
on page 3-60 DIC Controls and Displays.

3-19

Front Reading Lamps

Battery Run-Down Protection

If the vehicle has a sunroof, there are reading lamps in
front of the sunroof switch located on the headliner.
These lamps will come on when the doors are opened.
Press the side of each reading lamp to turn them on
and off when the doors are closed.

The vehicle has a feature to help prevent the battery
from draining in case the interior, trunk, or underhood
lamps are accidentally left on. If any of these lamps are
left on while the ignition is in OFF, they will automatically
turn off after 10 minutes. The lamps will not come
back on again until any of the following are done:

Overhead Console Reading Lamps
The vehicle may have reading lamps on the overhead
console. These lamps will turn on when the doors
are opened. When the doors are closed, press the side
of each lamp to turn them on and off.

Rear Assist Handle Reading Lamps
If the vehicle has a reading lamp on each rear assist
handle, press the side of each lamp to turn it on or off.

3-20

• The ignition is turned to RUN or ACC.
• The interior lamps control is turned completely to
the right, then back slightly to the left.

• Open, or close and reopen, a door that is closed.
If the vehicle has less than 15 miles (25 km) on
the odometer, the battery saver will turn off the lamps
after only three minutes.

Head-Up Display (HUD)

{CAUTION:
If the HUD image is too bright or too high in
your field of view, it may take you more time to
see things you need to see when it is dark
outside. Be sure to keep the HUD image dim
and placed low in your field of view.

The HUD information can be displayed in one of
three languages, English, French, or Spanish. The
speedometer reading and other numerical values can
be displayed in either English or metric units.
The language selection and the units of measurement
are changed through the trip computer in the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See “Options” under
DIC Controls and Displays (Base Level DIC) on
page 3-52 or DIC Controls and Displays (Uplevel DIC
with Trip Computer) on page 3-60.

If the vehicle has the Head-Up Display (HUD), some
information concerning the operation of the vehicle
is projected onto the windshield. This includes
the speedometer reading, transaxle positions, compass
direction, outside air temperature, the tap shift gear
and the upshift symbol if active, and a brief display of
the current radio station, including XM information or
CD track. It will also display turn-by-turn navigation
information if the vehicle is equipped with a navigation
radio. The images are projected by the HUD lens
located on the driver’s side of the instrument panel.
The tap shift gear and the upshift symbol will also
appear on the HUD if the vehicle is equipped with tap
shift and it is active.

The HUD information appears as an image focused out
toward the front of the vehicle.

3-21

When the ignition key is turned to RUN, the HUD will
display an introductory message for a short time,
until the HUD has warmed up.
The following indicator lights come on the instrument
panel when activated and will also appear on the HUD:

• Turn Signal Indicators
• High-Beam Indicator Symbol

When the HUD is on, the speedometer reading will
continually be displayed. The current radio station or
CD track number will display for a short period of time
after the radio or CD track status changes. This will
happen whenever one of the radio controls is pressed.
The speedometer size will be reduced when radio,
CD information, warnings, or turn-by-turn navigation
information are displayed on the HUD.

The HUD will temporarily display CHECK TRIP
COMPUTER when there are messages on the DIC trip
computer.

The HUD control is located
on the console.

The HUD will also display the following messages when
these systems, if equipped, are active:

• TRACTION CONTROL ACTIVE
• STABILITY CONTROL ACTIVE
The HUD will temporarily display the TRACTION
CONTROL OFF message when the traction control
system is turned off.
The HUD will temporarily display the CRUISE SET
message when cruise control is activated or cruise
speed is increased.
Notice: If you try to use the HUD image as a
parking aid, you may misjudge the distance and
damage your vehicle. Do not use the HUD image as
a parking aid.

3-22

To adjust the HUD image so that items are properly
displayed, do the following:
1. Adjust the driver’s seat to a comfortable position.
2. Start the engine.
3. Adjust the HUD controls.

Use the following settings to adjust the HUD.

9 (Off): Rotate the outer ring on the HUD control to
this position to turn the HUD off.
I II III IIII (Brightness): Turn the outer ring on the HUD
control clockwise to dim the display and
counterclockwise to brighten it.

w (Up): Press this portion of the switch on the HUD
control to move the image up.

x (Down): Press this portion of the switch on the HUD
control to move the image down. Move the image as
low as possible on the windshield, keeping it in full view.
? (Page): Press this button to select the display
formats. Release the page button when the format
number with the desired display is shown on the HUD.
• Format One: This display gives the speedometer
reading (in English or metric units), transaxle
positions, compass direction, and the outside air
temperature.

• Format Two: This display includes the information
in Format One without the compass direction and
the outside air temperature.

• Format Three: This display includes all the
information in Format One, but turns the instrument
cluster lighting off. Format three is only available
at night.

All formats will show the turn-by-turn navigation
information. It will display the next turn, direction, street
name, and distance to the selected destination.
When you near your destination, the HUD will display a
distance bar that will fill in the closer you get to your
destination. All navigation information is provided to the
HUD by the navigation radio, if equipped.
The warning indicators still appear on the instrument
panel when required. The HUD will display Stealth
Mode On.
The HUD will store the last display format selected.
If the last format displayed was Format One or Format
Three, then Format One will be displayed when the
vehicle is started.
If the last format was Format Two, then Format Two
will be displayed.
The HUD image displayed on the windshield will
automatically dim and brighten to compensate for
outside lighting.
The HUD image can temporarily light up depending on
the angle and position of the sunlight on the HUD
display. This is normal and will change when the angle
of the sunlight on the HUD display changes.
Polarized sunglasses could make the HUD image
harder to see.

3-23

Care of the HUD
Clean the inside of the windshield as needed to remove
any dirt or film that could reduce the sharpness or
clarity of the HUD image.
To clean the HUD lens, use a soft, clean cloth that has
household glass cleaner sprayed on it. Wipe the HUD
lens gently, then dry it. Do not spray cleaner directly on
the lens because the cleaner could leak into the unit.

Accessory Power Outlet(s)
The vehicle has
two 12-volt outlets which
can be used to plug in
electrical equipment.

If You Cannot See the HUD Image
When the Ignition Is On
•
•
•
•
•

Is anything covering the HUD lens?
Is the HUD dimmer setting bright enough?
Is the HUD image adjusted to the proper height?
Are you wearing polarized sunglasses?
Still no HUD image? Check the fuse in the
instrument panel fuse block. See Instrument Panel
Fuse Block on page 5-112.

If the HUD Image Is Not Clear
• Is the HUD image too bright?
• Are the windshield and HUD lens clean?
If the HUD image is not correct, contact your dealer.
Keep in mind that the windshield is part of the HUD
system. See Windshield Replacement on page 5-60.

3-24

One accessory power outlet is located on the center
console, below the front edge of the storage console.
The other is located inside the console.
Remove the tethered cap to use the outlet. When
not using the outlet, be sure to cover it with the
protective cap.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always turn
off electrical equipment when not in use and do
not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum
amperage rating.

Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result
in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. See your dealer for
additional information on accessory power outlets.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage rating. Check
with your dealer before adding electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow
the proper installation instructions included with it.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.

Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
Ashtray
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other flammable
items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them and possibly
damage your vehicle. Never put flammable items in
the ashtray.
If your vehicle is equipped, the ashtray is located to the
right of the transaxle shift lever on the center console.
To open it, push and release the rear of the cover.
To empty the ashtray, lift the side tab and pull up
to remove the ashtray from the center console. To
reinstall, push the tray back into place.

Cigarette Lighter
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
If your vehicle is equipped with a cigarette lighter, it is
located on the center console.
Push the lighter to activate the heating element and
release it. Once the heating element is hot, it will pop out
by itself.
3-25

Climate Controls
Climate Control System
The climate control system allows manual control of the
heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle.

9(Off): Turn the knob to this position to turn the
climate control system off. Only the heated seat and/or
rear defrost can be operated when the fan is off.
Mode
Turn the middle knob to select the following modes:

H(Vent) (Outside Air):

This mode directs outside air
to the instrument panel outlets. If driving in city traffic,
and the vehicle is stopped and idling, or the weather is
hot, press the recirculation button. To prevent the air
inside the vehicle from becoming stale, be sure to turn
off recirculation periodically.

)(Bi-Level):

Fan

This mode directs half of the air to the
instrument panel outlets, and the remaining air to
the floor outlets. Some air may be directed toward the
windshield. Slightly cooler air is directed to the
instrument panel outlets and warmer air is directed to
the floor outlets.

9(Fan):

6(Floor):

Turn the knob by this symbol, located on the
left side of the climate control panel, clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed.
The fan speed will be temporarily reduced between
the transition to a new mode. The fan will resume the
original speed when the transition to the new mode
is complete.

3-26

This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets with some air directed toward the side
window outlets and a little air directed to the windshield.
In this mode, the system will automatically use outside
air. The air conditioning compressor will be engaged
unless the outside temperature is 40°F (4°C) or below.

The middle knob on the climate control panel can also
be used to select the defog or defrost mode.

This mode will automatically use outside air. The air
conditioning compressor will be engaged unless
the outside temperature is 40°F (4°C) or below.
Recirculation cannot be selected when in this mode
even though the indicator light comes on when
the recirculation button is pressed.

Defogging and Defrosting

1 (Defrost):

Recirculation cannot be selected when in this mode
even though the indicator light comes on when
the recirculation button is pressed.

Fog on the inside of the vehicle is a result of high
humidity causing moisture to condense on the cool
window glass. This can be minimized if the climate
control system is used properly. There are two modes
to clear frost or fog from the windshield. Use the
defog mode to clear the windows of condensation and
to warm the vehicle’s occupants. Use the defrost
mode to remove frost or condensation from the
windshield quickly.

Use the defrost mode to remove fog or
frost from the windshield more quickly. This mode
directs most of the air to the windshield and the side
window outlets, with some air directed to the floor
outlets. This mode has a timer and will shut off after
five minutes.

See “Rear Window Defogger” later in this section for
information on clearing the rear window of fog or ice.

This mode will automatically use outside air. The air
conditioning compressor will be engaged unless
the outside temperature is 40°F (4°C) or below.
Recirculation cannot be selected when in this mode
even though the indicator light comes on when
the recirculation button is pressed.

.(Floor/Defog):

Temperature

Use the floor/defog mode to clear the
windows of fog or moisture and to warm the passengers.
This mode directs the air equally between the
windshield and the floor outlets, along with some
directed to the side window outlets.

The knob on the right of the climate control panel is the
temperature adjustment that can be used with any of
the climate control modes.
Turn the knob clockwise for warmer settings and
counterclockwise for colder settings.

3-27

Air Conditioning
#(Air Conditioner):

Press this button to turn the air
conditioning compressor on or off. An indicator light
to the right of the button will come on. This button has
no control over the air conditioning compressor when in
Floor/Defog and Defrost modes. The instrument
panel brightness control may have to be adjusted to the
highest setting in order to see the indicator. See
Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3-18 for
additional information.
On hot days during the vehicle’s initial start-up, open
the windows to let hot inside air escape; then close
them. This helps to reduce the time it takes for
the vehicle to cool down. It also helps the system to
operate more efficiently.
For quicker cool down on hot days, do the following:
1. Select any mode setting between vent and the
setting before defrost.
2. Select the air conditioner.
3. Select the coolest temperature.
4. Select the highest climate control fan speed.
Using these settings will set recirculation for quicker
cool down (the light indicator will light). If outside air is
desired, press the recirculation button (light indicator
will turn off).

3-28

Using these settings together for long periods of time
may cause the air inside the vehicle to become too dry.
To prevent this from happening, after five minutes
the recirculation door will open slightly to allow some
outside air into the vehicle.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so sometimes there may be a small amount of
water dripping underneath the vehicle while it is idling or
after the engine is turned off. This is normal.

Recirculation
h(Recirculation):

Press this button to activate the
recirculation mode. With this selection, inside air is
recirculated into the vehicle. This mode reduces outside
air and odors from entering the vehicle. It may also help
to heat or cool the air inside the vehicle more quickly.
An indicator light to the right of the button will come on to
show that the recirculation button has been pressed. The
instrument panel brightness control may have to be
adjusted to the highest setting to see the indicator.
The recirculation mode has a timer. After five minutes,
the system’s air inlet door will move slightly to allow for
ten percent fresh outside air to maintain interior air
quality. The only way to reset the system to full
recirculation is to restart the five minute timer by
selecting vent/outside air and recirculation again.

Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window. Be sure to
clear as much snow from the rear window as possible.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object
to clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere
anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass.
These actions may damage the rear defogger.
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.

Dual Automatic Climate
Control System
With this system you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation for your vehicle.

=(Rear Window Defogger): Press this button to turn
the rear window defogger on or off.
An indicator light to the right of the button will come on
to show that the rear window defogger is on. The
instrument panel brightness control may have to be
adjusted to the highest setting during the daytime
in order to see the indicator light.
The rear window defogger will turn off approximately
20 minutes after the button is pressed. If the button is
pressed again, it will run another 20 minutes. The
defogger can be turned off by pressing the button again
or by turning off the engine.
Do not drive the vehicle until all windows are clear.

Automatic Operation
AUTO (Automatic): Turn both the fan and mode knob
to AUTO for automatic control of the inside temperature,
the air delivery mode and the fan speed. You may notice
a delay of two to three minutes before the fan comes on
when the automatic operation is used in cold weather.
For the automatic system to function, the temperature
must be set between 60°F (15°C) and 90°F (32°C).
1. Adjust the temperature to a comfortable setting.

3-29

2. Press the PASS. button to turn the passenger
climate control system on and off. When the
passenger system is off, the driver’s temperature
setting is also used for the passenger and the
passenger display is off.
In cold weather, the system will start at reduced fan
speeds to avoid blowing cold air into your vehicle
until warmer air is available. The system will
start out blowing air at the floor but may change
modes automatically as the vehicle warms up
to maintain the chosen temperature setting. The
length of time needed for the air to warm up
will depend on the outside temperature and the
length of time that has elapsed since your vehicle
was last driven.
3. Wait for the system to regulate. This may take from
10 to 30 minutes. Then adjust the temperature, if
necessary.
Do not cover the solar sensor located in the center of
the instrument panel, near the windshield. For more
information on the solar sensor, see “Sensors” later in
this section.

3-30

Manual Operation
x w (Temperature): To manually adjust the
temperature inside the vehicle, press the up arrow on
the temperature control to raise the temperature
and press the down arrow to lower the temperature.
The display will show your selection.
When one temperature is displayed, the driver
temperature is set. When both temperatures are
displayed, the temperature for both the driver and
passenger are set. Pressing PASS. will turn the
passenger temperature setting on and off. If only the
driver temperature is set, the driver temperature is used
for the passenger and the passenger display is off.

9(Fan):

Turn the fan knob clockwise to increase the
fan speed and counterclockwise to decrease the fan
speed. Turning the fan knob cancels the automatic fan
operation and places the system in manual. Turn the
knob to AUTO to return to automatic fan operation. If the
airflow seems low when the fan is at the highest setting,
the passenger compartment air filter, if equipped, may
need to be replaced. See Passenger Compartment Air
Filter on page 3-33 for additional information.

9 (Off): Turning the fan knob off will turn the
controller completely off. Only the rear window defogger
and heated seats will function when the fan knob is off.

The indicator light on the air condition button will light
every time the vehicle is started. The air conditioner may
be turned off by pressing the air conditioner button.

Air Flow: This control has several settings to control
the direction of airflow.

? (Recirculation): Press this button to turn the
recirculation mode on or off. This mode keeps outside air
from coming in the vehicle. It can be used to prevent
outside air and odors from entering your vehicle or to help
cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly.

To change the current mode, select one of the following:
AUTO: This mode is automatically set depending on
the temperature in the vehicle and solar sensor
information.

H (Vent):

This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.

% (Bi-Level): This mode directs airflow to the
instrument panel outlets and to the floor outlets. A small
amount of air is also directed to the windshield and
the side window outlets.
6 (Floor):

This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets with some air directed to the side window
outlets, and a little air directed to the windshield.

Recirculation is not available in defrost or floor/defog
mode. Pressing the recirculation button will turn on the
indicator light.
Using recirculation for long periods of time may cause the
air inside your vehicle to become too dry. To prevent this
from happening, after the air in your vehicle has cooled,
turn the recirculation mode off.

z (Heated Seats):

Press this button to turn the
heated seats on and off. The button on the left controls
the driver’s seat and the button on the right controls
the passenger’s seat. See Heated Seats on page 1-3 for
additional information.

# (Air Conditioning):

Press this button to turn
the air conditioning compressor on or off. The indicator
light on the button will come on when the air
conditioning is on.

3-31

Sensors
The solar sensor on your vehicle monitors the solar
radiation and the air inside of your vehicle, then uses the
information to maintain the selected temperature by
initiating needed adjustments to the temperature, the fan
speed and the air delivery system. The system may
also supply cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the
sun. The recirculation mode will also be activated, as
necessary. Do not cover the solar sensor located in the
center of the instrument panel, near the windshield,
or the system will not work properly.

Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. This
can be minimized if the climate control system is
used properly. There are two modes to clear fog or frost
from your windshield. Use the floor/defog mode to
clear the windows of fog or moisture and warm
the passengers. Use defrost to remove fog or frost from
the windshield more quickly.

3-32

- (Floor/Defog): This mode directs the air between
the windshield, floor outlets and side windows. When
you select this mode, the system turns off recirculation
and runs the air-conditioning compressor unless the
outside temperature is near or below freezing. Pressing
the recirculation button, while in this mode, will have
no effect other than turning on the indicator light.
1 (Defrost):

This mode directs most of the air to the
windshield, with some air directed to the side windows.
In this mode, the system will automatically turn off
the recirculation and run the air conditioning compressor,
unless the outside temperature is near or below
freezing. Pressing the recirculation button, while in this
mode, will have no affect other than turning on the
indicator light.

Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window.
The rear window defogger will only work when the
engine is running.

= (Rear Window Defogger): Press this button to
turn the rear window defogger on and off. Be sure
to clear as much snow from the rear window as possible.
The rear window defogger will turn off approximately
20 minutes after the button is pressed. If turned on
again, the defogger will only run for approximately
20 minutes before turning off. The defogger can also be
turned off by pressing the button again or by turning
off the engine.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside
of the rear window. If you do, you could cut or
damage the warming grid, and the repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not attach a
temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything
similar to the defogger grid.

Outlet Adjustment
Rotate and turn the air outlets, located in the middle
and at each outboard side of the instrument panel,
to adjust the direction of the airflow.

Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into the vehicle.

• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.

• Keep the path under the front seats clear of
objects to help circulate the air inside of the
vehicle more effectively.

• If the airflow seems low when the fan is at the
highest setting, the passenger compartment air
filter may need to be replaced. See “Passenger
Compartment Air Filter” following, for more
information.

Passenger Compartment Air Filter
The passenger compartment air filter is located near the
passenger’s side windshield wiper arm, underneath
the inlet grille.
The filter traps most of the pollen from entering the
climate control system. Similar to the engine’s air filter,
it may need to be changed periodically to insure
system performance. See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 6-4 for more information.

3-33

To change the passenger compartment air filter, do the
following:
1. Turn the ignition to ACC and the windshield
wipers on.
2. Turn the ignition to OFF when the windshield
wipers are in the upright position.

7. Remove the air inlet grille by sliding it down to
disengage the two tabs that hold it to the bottom
of the windshield glass. Place the grille on the
windshield while you remove the filter. Do not try to
remove the grille from the vehicle because it is
still attached on the right side by a fastener.

3. Raise the hood.
4. Disconnect the windshield washer pump hose from
the fender rail and the air inlet grille.
5. Remove the hood weather-strip from the
passenger’s side of the vehicle, peeling it
back halfway.

6. Remove the two air inlet grille retainers using a flat
tool to first pry up on the center post and then the
remainder of the fastener can be pulled out.

3-34

8. Remove the passenger compartment air filter by
pulling on the tab.
9. Install a new passenger compartment air filter.
Make sure it slides under the compartment
retainers. Be sure the long rubber water deflector
above the filter stays in place.
10. Reverse steps 1 through 7.

Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on the vehicle. The pictures help to locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
the warning lights and gages could also save you or
others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of the vehicle’s functions. As the details
show on the next few pages, some warning lights come
on briefly when the engine is started just to indicate they
are working. If you are familiar with this section, you
should not be alarmed when this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of the vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to indicate when there is a
problem with the vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
while the vehicle is being driven, or when one of the
gages shows there may be a problem, check the section
that tells you what to do about it. Follow this manual’s
advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly – and
even dangerous. So please get to know the vehicle’s
warning lights and gages. They can be a big help.
The vehicle also has a Driver Information Center (DIC)
that works along with the warning lights and gages.
See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-52 for
more information.

3-35

Instrument Panel Cluster
The instrument panel cluster is designed to show at a glance how the vehicle is running. It will show how fast the
vehicle is going, about how much fuel is in the fuel tank, and many other things needed to drive the vehicle safely and
economically.

United States version shown, Canada similar

3-36

The vehicle is equipped with this cluster or one very
similar to it. It has indicator warning lights that are
explained on the following pages. Be sure to read
about them.

Speedometer and Odometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle’s speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
The odometer, located on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) display, shows how far the vehicle has been
driven, in either miles or kilometers. See DIC Controls
and Displays (Base Level DIC) on page 3-52 or DIC
Controls and Displays (Uplevel DIC with Trip Computer)
on page 3-60 for more information.

Trip Odometer
The trip odometer, located in the Driver Information
Center (DIC), tells how far the vehicle has driven since it
was last reset. The miles (kilometers) for two different
trips can be viewed. See DIC Controls and Displays
(Base Level DIC) on page 3-52 or DIC Controls and
Displays (Uplevel DIC with Trip Computer) on page 3-60
for more information on setting the trip odometer.

Tachometer

If the vehicle has the Head-Up Display (HUD) the speed
will also be displayed on the HUD screen.
If a vehicle has to have a new odometer installed, a
new one can be set to the mileage total of the old
odometer, if that can be done. If it cannot, than it will be
set at zero and a label must be put on the driver’s
door to show the old mileage reading when the new
odometer was installed.

The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
Notice: If you operate the engine with the
tachometer in the shaded warning area, your vehicle
could be damaged, and the damages would not be
covered by your warranty. Do not operate the engine
with the tachometer in the shaded warning area.
3-37

Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will
sound for several seconds to remind you and your
passengers to buckle your safety belts. The driver safety
belt light will also come on and stay on for several
seconds, then it will flash for several more. You should
buckle your seat belt.
If the driver’s belt is
buckled, neither the chime
nor the light will come on.

Passenger Safety Belt
Reminder Light
Several seconds after the key is turned to RUN or
START, a chime will sound for several seconds
to remind the front passenger to buckle their safety belt.
This would only occur if the passenger airbag is
enabled. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-61
for more information. The passenger safety belt light
will also come on and stay on for several seconds, then
it will flash for several more.
If the passenger’s safety
belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light will
come on.

3-38

Airbag Readiness Light
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the airbag symbol. The system
checks the airbag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light indicates if there is an electrical problem.
The system check includes the airbag sensors,
the airbag modules, the wiring, and the diagnostic
module. For more information on the airbag system, see
Airbag System on page 1-52.
This light will come on
when the vehicle is
started, and it will flash for
a few seconds. Then
the light should go out.
This means the system is
functioning properly.

{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle
serviced right away if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when the ignition key is turned to RUN. If the
light does not come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

If the airbag readiness light stays on after the vehicle is
started, or comes on as the vehicle is being driven,
the airbag system may not work properly. Have
the vehicle serviced right away.

3-39

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
Your instrument panel has a passenger airbag
status indicator.

If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).

{CAUTION:

Passenger
Airbag Status
Indicator – United
States

Passenger
Airbag Status
Indicator – Canada

When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START, the
passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and
OFF, or the symbol for on and off, for several seconds
as a system check. If you use remote start to start
your vehicle from a distance (if equipped), you may not
see the system check. Then, after several more
seconds, the status indicator will light either ON or OFF,
or either the on or off symbol to let you know the
status of the right front passenger’s frontal airbag.

3-40

If the on indicator comes on when you have a
rear-facing child restraint installed in the right
front passenger’s seat, it means that the
passenger sensing system has not turned off
the passenger’s frontal airbag. A child in a
rear-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger’s
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close
to the inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front passenger’s
seat if the airbag is turned on.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a
rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This
is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if
the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is failsafe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. We recommend that rear-facing
child restraints be secured in the rear seat,
even if the airbag is off.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-61
for more on this, including important safety information.

If, after several seconds, all status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer for service.

{CAUTION:
If the off indicator and the airbag readiness
light ever come on together, it means that
something may be wrong with the airbag
system. If this ever happens, have the vehicle
serviced promptly, because an adult-size
person sitting in the right front passenger seat
may not have the protection of the frontal
airbag. See Airbag Readiness Light on
page 3-39.

3-41

Up-Shift Light

Brake System Warning Light
This symbol can appear on
the instrument panel if the
vehicle has a V8 or
supercharged engine and
the shift lever is in the
manual transaxle position.

The vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part can
still work and stop the vehicle. For good braking,
though, both parts should be working well.

It will appear as a prompt to up-shift to the next gear
using one of the Tap-Shift® paddles located on the
steering wheel.
If equipped, this symbol will appear on the Head Up
Display (HUD) only.
See Automatic Transaxle Operation on page 2-25 and
Head-Up Display (HUD) on page 3-21 for more
information.

3-42

United States

Canada

This light should come on briefly when the ignition key is
turned to RUN. If it does not come on then, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will also come on when the parking brake is set.
The light will stay on if the parking brake does not
release fully. If it stays on after the parking brake is fully
released, it means the vehicle has a brake problem.
The PARKING BRAKE ON message will also appear in
the Driver Information Center (DIC) when the parking
brake is set and the vehicle is going faster than 5 mph.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-72 for
more information.
The brake warning light may also come on when the
brake fluid is low. If this occurs, the LOW BRAKE FLUID
message will also appear in the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-72 for more information.

If the brake warning light comes on while the vehicle is
being driven, pull off the road and stop carefully.
The brake pedal may be harder to push, or it may go
closer to the floor. It may also take the vehicle longer to
stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for
service. See Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-38.

{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light is on.
Driving with the brake system warning light on
can lead to an accident. If the light is still on
after you have pulled off the road and stopped
carefully, have the vehicle towed for service.

3-43

Anti-Lock Brake System
Warning Light
If the vehicle has the
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS), this light will come
on when the engine is
started and may stay on
for several seconds.
That is normal.
If the ABS warning light comes on and stays on, there
may be a problem with the anti-lock portion of the brake
system. If the brake system warning light is not on,
the vehicle still has brakes, but it does not have anti-lock
brakes. See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-42.

3-44

If the light stays on, the vehicle needs service. If the
light comes on while the vehicle is being driven, stop as
soon as possible and turn the ignition off. Then start
the vehicle again to reset the system. If the light
still stays on, or comes on again while driving, the
vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system
warning light is not on, the vehicle still has brakes, but it
does not have anti-lock brakes. If the brake system
warning light is also on, the vehicle does not have
anti-lock brakes and there is a problem with the regular
brakes. See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-42.
If both the brake system warning light and the anti-lock
brake system light is on, pull off the road and have
the vehicle towed for service.
The anti-lock brake system warning light will come on
briefly when the ignition key is turned to RUN. This
is normal. If the light does not come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light
If the vehicle has the
3800 supercharged V6
engine or the 5300 V8
engine and the Traction
Control System (TCS), this
light may come on for the
following reasons:

• The Traction Control button, located on the center
console, is pressed, turning the system off. The light
will stay on. To turn the system back on, press the
button again and the warning light should go out. See
Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-9 for more
information.

• If there is a brake system problem that is specifically
related to traction control, the TCS will turn off and
the warning light will come on.

• If the brakes begin to overheat, the TCS will turn off
and the warning light will come on until the brakes
cool down.

Enhanced Traction System
Warning Light
If the vehicle is equipped
with the Enhanced
Traction System (ETS),
this light may come on for
the following reasons:

• If the Traction Control button located on the center
console is pressed, turning the system off. This
light will come on and stay on. To turn the system
back on, press the button again and the warning
light should turn off. See Enhanced Traction System
(ETS) on page 4-11.

• If the system is affected by an engine-related
problem, the system will turn off and the warning
light will come on.
If the light comes on and stays on for an extended
period of time when the system is turned on, the vehicle
needs service.

If the traction control system warning light comes on
and stays on for an extended period of time when the
system is turned on, the vehicle needs service.
3-45

Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
This light indicates that
the engine coolant has
overheated or the
radiator cooling fan
is not working.

If the vehicle has been operating under normal driving
conditions, pull off the road, stop the vehicle, and turn off
the engine as soon as possible.
See Cooling System on page 5-30 for more information.

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
The vehicle has a gage
that shows the engine
coolant temperature.

If the gage pointer moves into the shaded area, the
engine is too hot. That reading means the engine
coolant has overheated. If you have been operating the
vehicle under normal driving conditions, you should
pull off the road, stop the vehicle, and turn off the engine
as soon as possible.
See Cooling System on page 5-30 for more information.

3-46

Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition, and emission
control systems.

This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The check engine light comes on to
indicate that there is a problem and service is required.
Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system
before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more
serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also
designed to assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after awhile, your emission controls
may not work as well, your fuel economy may not
be as good, and your engine may not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may
not be covered by your warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of your
vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with
other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This may
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
and Modifications on page 5-3.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is
not running. If the light does not come on, have it
repaired. This light will also come on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and may damage the emission control system on
your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be
required.

• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service may be required.

3-47

If the Light is Flashing

If the Light Is On Steady

The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:

You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:

•
•
•
•

Reducing vehicle speed

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

Avoiding hard accelerations

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 5-7. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.

Avoiding steep uphill grades
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still
flashing, follow the previous steps, and see your dealer
for service as soon as possible.

3-48

Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality will
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has
the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems that may have
developed.

Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.

3-49

Oil Pressure Light
If there is a problem with
the vehicle’s oil pressure,
this light may stay on
when the engine is started,
or it may come on while
the vehicle is being driven.

This indicates that oil is not going through the engine
quickly enough to keep it lubricated. The engine
could be low on oil or could have some other oil
problem. Have it fixed right away.
The oil light could also come on in two other situations:

• When the ignition is on but the engine is not
running, the light will come on as a test to indicate
it is working. The light will go out when the
ignition is turned to RUN. If it does not come on
while the ignition is in the on position, there may be
a problem with the fuse or bulb. See Fuses and
Circuit Breakers on page 5-112.

{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.

Fog Lamp Light
This light will come on
when the fog lamps
are in use.

• If the brakes are applied quickly and the vehicle
makes a hard stop, the light may come on for a
moment. This is normal.
The light will go out when the fog lamps are turned off.
See Fog Lamps on page 3-17 for more information.
3-50

Cruise Control Light
This light comes on
whenever you set your
cruise control.

The light will go out when the cruise control is turned
off. See Cruise Control on page 3-11 for more
information.

Highbeam On Light
This light comes on
whenever the high-beam
headlamps are on.

See “Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer” under
Exterior Lamps on page 3-15 for additional information.

Fuel Gage
The fuel gage shows
about how much fuel is left
in the fuel tank when the
ignition is on.

When the indicator nears empty, there is still a little fuel
left, but you should get more soon.
Here are four things owners usually ask about the fuel
gage. All these situations are normal and do not
indicate a problem with the fuel gage:
• At the gas station the pump shuts off before the
gage reads full.
• It takes more or less fuel to fill up than the gage
indicates. For example, the gage reads half full,
but it took more or less than half the tank’s capacity
to fill it.
• The gage pointer may move while cornering,
braking or speeding up.
• The gage may not indicate full when the ignition is
turned off.
3-51

Driver Information Center (DIC)

Trip Odometer

The Driver Information Center (DIC) gives important
safety and maintenance facts. When the vehicle’s
ignition is turned on, all of the DIC lights illuminate for a
few seconds and an introductory message will appear.
After this, the DIC will begin working.

3 (Trip Odometer): Press this button to access the
odometer and trip distance modes.

DIC Controls and Displays
(Base Level DIC)

Press the trip odometer button to advance to the
next menu.

The Driver Information Center (DIC) control buttons and
the message display screen are located above the radio.
The DIC gives important safety and maintenance facts
concerning the vehicle. The status of many of the
vehicle’s systems along with driver personal
programming mode menus and warning messages about
the vehicle’s systems may display on the DIC screen.
The vehicle’s transaxle position will also appear.

The first menu on the DIC screen will be the odometer
reading, or cumulative mileage of the vehicle. The
odometer cannot be reset.

Trip Distances: This menu shows the distances that
the vehicle has driven between specific points. The trip
odometer will record the number of miles up to
9,999.9 miles or 9 999.9 km travelled for up to two trips.
When 9,999.9 miles or 9 999.9 km is reached for either
trip, the odometer for that trip will go back to zero.
Press the trip odometer button again to access TRIP A.
Press the trip odometer button again to access TRIP B.
To reset the trip odometer(s) back to zero miles or
kilometers, access the trip to reset and press the set/
reset button.
The trip odometer has a feature called the retro-active
reset. This can be used to set the trip odometer to the
number of miles or kilometers driven since the ignition
was last turned on. This can be used if the trip odometer
was not reset at the beginning of the trip.

The buttons on the base level are trip odometer,
set/reset, and options.
3-52

To use the retro-active reset feature, press and hold the
set/reset button for at least three seconds. The trip
odometer will display the number of miles or kilometers
driven since the ignition was last turned on and the
vehicle began moving. Once the vehicle has begun
moving, the trip odometer will accumulate mileage. For
example, if the vehicle was driven 5.0 miles (8.0 km)
before the vehicle is started again, and then the
retro-active reset feature is activated, the display will
show 5.0 miles (8.0 km). As the vehicle begins moving,
the display will increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km), 5.2 miles
(8.4 km), etc.
If the retro-active reset feature is activated after the
vehicle is started, but before it begins moving, the display
will show the number of miles or kilometers that were
driven during the last ignition cycle.
Press the trip odometer button again to access
the odometer.

Set/Reset

r (Set/Reset): Press this button to set or reset
a menu item when using the trip odometer or
options buttons.

Options

4 (Options): Press this button to access the Date,
Language, Display Units, Daytime Display
Enhancements, Engine Oil Monitor System, Tire Inflation
Monitor System, and Personal Programming modes.
Date: This menu sets the date.
The time is set through the radio. See Setting the Time
on page 3-96 for more information.
To set the date, use the following procedure:
1. Press the options button until the date is displayed
on the DIC.
2. Press the set/reset button to access the RESET
YEAR screen. The second position in the year
will be selected. Press and hold the set/reset button
to scroll through the available digits. Release the
button when the correct digit appears.
3. Press the options button to advance to the first
position in the year. Press and hold the set/reset
button to scroll through the available digits. Release
the button when the correct digit appears.
4. Press the options button to advance to the months
of the year.

3-53

5. Press the set/reset button to scroll through the
months of the year, releasing the button when
the correct month appears.
6. Press the options button to advance to the days of
the month.
7. Press the set/reset button to scroll through the days
of the month, releasing the button when the correct
day appears.
8. Press the options button again to advance to the
main date screen. The screen will now display the
new date.
Language: This menu allows the selection of the
language in which the DIC messages will appear. The
DIC can be programmed to one of three languages:
English, French or Spanish. The message on the HUD,
if equipped, will also appear in the language selected.
See Head-Up Display (HUD) on page 3-21.
To change the language, use the following procedure:
1. Press the options button to enter the
language screen.
2. Press the set/reset button to scroll through and set
the language choice.
3. Press the options button again to advance to the
next screen.

3-54

Display Units: This menu allows selection of
measurements to be displayed in English or metric
units. The messages on the HUD, if equipped, and the
instrument panel cluster will also appear with the
type of measurement selected.
To set the measurement when Display Units is shown,
use the following procedure:
1. Press the set/reset button to select ENGLISH
or METRIC.
2. Press the options button again to advance to the
next screen.
DAYTIME DISPLAY ENHANCEMENTS: This menu
allows selection of the color of the display message.
When ON is selected for the daytime enhancement, the
messages will appear black on a red screen. This
combination makes it easier to see the DIC messages
during the daytime. When OFF is selected, or when
the headlamps are on, the messages will appear red on
a black background.
To set the daytime display enhancements, use the
following procedure:
1. Press the set/reset button to select OFF or ON.
2. Press the options button again to advance to
the next screen.

ENGINE OIL MONITOR SYSTEM: This menu allows
the engine oil monitor system to be reset. To reset
the engine oil monitor system, see Engine Oil Life
System on page 5-19.
Tire Inflation Monitor System: If the vehicle has ABS,
this menu sets the tire inflation monitor system. See “Tire
Inflation Monitor System” under Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-67 for more information.
To set or reset the tire inflation monitor system, use the
following procedure:
1. Press the set/reset button to reset the tire inflation
monitor system. The message, TIRE INFLATION
HAS BEEN SET, will appear on the screen if
the Check Tire Pressure message, indicating an
irregularity in the pressure of one of the tires,
had previously appeared on the DIC. If the Check
Tire Pressure message did not appear and the
set/reset button is pressed, the system will reset,
but no acknowledgment message will appear on the
screen.
2. Press the options button again to advance to the
next screen.
Select the set/reset button to return to the
main (date) screen.

PERSONAL PROGRAMMING MODE: This menu
allows you to customize several features on your
vehicle. These adjustments can only be made while the
vehicle is in PARK (P). Press the set/reset button to
display the first screen.

Personal Programming Mode Screens
Press the options button to access these modes:
EXTERIOR LIGHTING DELAY: This screen allows this
feature to be turned off or allows the selection of the
number of seconds the headlamps, sidelamps, taillamps,
fog lamps, and back-up lamps are turned on after the
key is removed from the ignition, or the vehicle is
unlocked using the remote keyless entry transmitter.
If OFF is selected, the exterior lamps will not turn on.
If a time delay is chosen, the lamps will turn on for
the selected time. The time delay will be cancelled and
the exterior lamps will turn on automatically when
the key is removed from the ignition, or the vehicle is
unlocked using the remote keyless entry transmitter.
To program this mode, use the following procedure:
1. Press and release the set/reset button to scroll to
the selection to be programmed. Choose from
OFF, 15, 30, 60, or 90 seconds.
2. Press the options button again to advance to the
next screen.
3-55

INTERIOR LIGHTS WHEN DOOR CLOSED: This
screen allows this feature to be turned OFF or ON.
If OFF is selected, the interior lamps will turn off
immediately when the ignition is turned off and the last
door is closed.

To program this mode, use the following procedure:
1. Press and release the set/reset button to scroll to
either OFF or ON.
2. Press the options button again to advance to the
next screen.

If ON is selected, the interior lamps will stay on for
about 25 seconds after the vehicle’s ignition is turned off
and the last door is closed.

AUTO DOOR LOCK: This screen allows this feature to
be turned OFF or ON.

To program this mode, use the following procedure:

If OFF is selected, all automatic door locking is disabled.
The doors will always need to be locked manually
before driving, to increase occupant safety.

1. Press and release the set/reset button to scroll to
either OFF or ON.
2. Press the options button again to advance to the
next screen.
INTERIOR LIGHTS WHEN KEY REMOVED: This
screen allows this feature to be turned OFF or ON. This
feature enables the interior lamps in the vehicle to
turn on for about 25 seconds after the key is removed
from the ignition.
If OFF is selected, removing the key from the ignition
will not cause the interior lamps to turn on.
If ON is selected, removing the key from the ignition will
cause the interior lamps to be turned on for about
25 seconds.

If ON is selected, the vehicle’s doors automatically lock
when the doors are closed and the vehicle is shifted
into DRIVE (D).
To program this mode, use the following procedure:
1. Press and release the set/reset button to scroll to
either OFF or ON.
2. Press the options button again to advance to the
next screen.
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK: This screen can be used if
ON was selected for the AUTO DOOR LOCK feature.
This screen allows this feature to be turned off, used for
the driver’s door only, or for all the doors.
If OFF is selected, none of the doors will unlock when
the vehicle’s transaxle is shifted into PARK (P).

3-56

If DRIVER is selected, only the driver’s door will unlock
when the vehicle’s transaxle is shifted into PARK (P).
If ALL is selected, all the doors will unlock when
the vehicle’s transaxle is shifted into PARK (P).
To program this mode, use the following procedure:
1. Press and release the set/reset button to scroll to
either OFF, DRIVER, or ALL.
2. Press the options button again to advance to the
next screen.
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK ON: If DRIVER or ALL was
selected on the AUTO DOOR UNLOCK screen,
this screen allows selection of when the vehicle’s doors
will unlock. The choices are when the key is removed
from the ignition or when the vehicle is shifted into
PARK (P).
If KEY-OUT is selected, the auto door unlock will
function when the key is taken out of the ignition.
If PARK is selected, the auto door unlock will function
when the transaxle is shifted into PARK (P).
To program this mode, use the following procedure:
1. Press and release the set/reset button to scroll to
either KEY-OUT or PARK.
2. Press the options button again to advance to the
next screen.

DELAYED LOCKING: This screen allows this feature
to be turned OFF or ON. The key must be out of
the ignition for this feature to work.
If OFF is selected, there will be no delayed locking of
the vehicle’s doors.
If ON is selected, the locking of the vehicle’s doors will
be delayed by five seconds after a power door lock
switch is pressed when a door is open, or the LOCK
button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is
pressed while a door is open.
To program this mode, use the following procedure:
1. Press and release the set/reset button to scroll to
either OFF or ON.
2. Press the options button again to advance to the
next screen.
REMOTE LOCKS FEEDBACK: This screen allows
selection for this option to be turned OFF, or gives the
choice of two methods of verification; LIGHTS or
LIGHTS and HORN; that indicate the vehicle’s doors
are locked when the LOCK button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter is pressed.
If OFF is selected, this feature will not be programmed.
If LIGHTS is selected, the exterior lamps will flash
when the LOCK button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter is pressed.
3-57

If LIGHTS and HORN are selected, the exterior lamps
will flash when the LOCK button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter is pressed and the horn will
sound when the LOCK button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter is pressed again within five seconds of
the previous command.
To program this mode, use the following procedure:
1. Press the set/reset button to scroll to OFF, LIGHTS,
or LIGHTS and HORN.
2. Press the options button again to advance to the
next screen.
If the vehicle does not have a content theft-deterrent
system, the next screens with PROGRAMMING
FINISHED and DISPLAY OFF will appear.
If the vehicle does have a content theft-deterrent
system, the next screen will appear.
THEFT DETERRENT: The vehicle may have a content
theft-deterrent system. Once it is turned on, the
system will activate if someone tries to enter the vehicle
without using the remote keyless entry transmitter or
the correct key. This screen allows this feature to
be turned OFF or ON.
If OFF is selected, the theft-deterrent system will not
function.

3-58

If ON is selected, the theft-deterrent system will be
activated.
To program this mode, use the following procedure:
1. Press the set/reset button to scroll to OFF or ON.
2. Press the options button again to advance to
the next screen.
KEY CYLINDER DISARM: If the vehicle has a content
theft-deterrent system, this screen allows this feature
to be turned OFF or ON.
If OFF is selected, the content theft-deterrent system
will not disarm when the vehicle is unlocked using
the door lock, or when someone tampers with the
door lock.
If ON is selected, the content theft-deterrent system
will disarm when the vehicle is unlocked using the door
key. This makes the vehicle more resistant to key
lock tampering.
To program this mode, use the following procedure:
1. Press the set/reset button to scroll to OFF or ON.
2. Press the options button again to advance to
the next screen.

LOCK SWITCH ARM: If the vehicle has the content
theft-deterrent system and ON was selected on
the THEFT DETERRENT screen, this screen allows this
feature to be turned OFF or ON. If ON is selected,
the content theft-deterrent system starts the arming
process when a door lock switch is pressed while a
door is open.

REMOTE START: If your vehicle has the remote start
feature, this screen allows this feature to be turned
OFF or ON. The remote start feature allows you to start
the engine from outside of the vehicle using your
remote keyless entry transmitter. See “Remote Vehicle
Start” under Remote Keyless Entry System Operation
on page 2-4 for more information.

If OFF is selected, the theft-deterrent system will not
activate this feature.

If OFF is selected, the remote start feature will
be disabled.

If ON is selected, the content theft-deterrent system will
arm when the doors are locked with the door lock
switch. The key must be removed from the ignition when
the doors are locked or the content theft-deterrent
system will not arm.

If ON is selected, the remote start feature will
be enabled.

To program this mode, use the following procedure:
1. Press the set/reset button to scroll to OFF or ON.
2. Press the options button again to advance to
the next screen.

To program this mode, use the following procedure:
1. Press the set/reset button to scroll to OFF or ON.
2. Press the options button again to advance to
the next screen.
PROGRAMMING FINISHED will appear on the next
screen. This confirms that the personal options
programming is complete.
DISPLAY OFF will appear on the next screen. The
screen will count down and then go blank. Press the
options button to advance to a new screen.

3-59

DIC Controls and Displays (Uplevel
DIC with Trip Computer)
The Driver Information Center (DIC) control buttons and
the message display screen are located above the
radio. The DIC gives important safety and maintenance
facts concerning the vehicle. The status of many of
the vehicle’s systems along with driver personalization
menus and warning messages about the vehicle’s
systems may display on the DIC screen.
The outside temperature automatically appears on the
bottom right corner of the DIC display screen. If the
outside temperature is below 38°F (3°C), the temperature
reading will toggle between displaying the outside
temperature and the word ICE for two minutes. If there is
a problem with the system that controls the temperature
display, the letters OC (Open Circuit) or SC (Short
Circuit) will appear on the display. If this occurs, have the
vehicle serviced by
your GM dealer.
The vehicle’s transaxle position and the direction the
vehicle is traveling will also appear on the DIC screen.

3-60

The compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to manually set the compass. However, under
certain circumstances, such as during a long distance
cross-country trip, it will be necessary to compensate for
compass variance and reset the zone through the
DIC. See “Setting the Compass” later in this section for
more information.

The buttons on the DIC trip computer are gages, trip
odometer, set/reset, options, and fuel.

Gages

2 (Gages): Press this button to access the OIL LIFE
REMAINING, TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE,
BATTERY, ENGINE HOURS, ENGINE BOOST, and
MAXIMUM Gs modes.

OIL LIFE REMAINING: Press the gages button until
OIL LIFE REMAINING is displayed. This screen
indicates the percentage of oil life in the vehicle’s engine
that has not degraded. See Engine Oil on page 5-16
for more information.

ENGINE HOURS: This screen shows the number of
cumulative hours the engine has operated while the key
was in the RUN position. This screen cannot be reset.

After the oil has been changed in the vehicle, reset the
ENGINE OIL MONITOR screen in the options menu.
To reset the engine oil monitor system, see Engine Oil
Life System on page 5-19.

ENGINE BOOST: If the vehicle has the supercharged
engine, this screen will appear. It shows a graphic
that indicates the amount of boost the engine is
receiving.

Press the gages button again to advance to the
next screen.

Press the gages button again to scroll to the
next screen.

TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMP: This screen displays
this message along with the temperature (F° or C°)
of the transmission fluid.

MAXIMUM Gs: If you have the GXP option, this screen
will appear. The DIC monitors and keeps track of the
maximum levels for acceleration, deceleration, and
lateral-acceleration achieved since the screen was last
reset. If you try to select this screen while the vehicle
is moving, the message MAXIMUM Gs NOT
AVAILABLE WHILE MOVING will display. To view the
maximum accelerations achieved since last reset,
you must bring the vehicle to a stop. Then the values
will be displayed. To reset the values to zero, press and
hold the set/reset button.

Press the gages button again to advance to the next
screen.
BATTERY: This screen displays the amount of volts
the battery is generating.
Your vehicle’s charging system regulates voltage based
on the state of the battery. The battery voltage may
fluctuate when viewing this information on the DIC. This
is normal.

Press the gages button to scroll to the next screen.

Press the gages button again to scroll to the
next screen.

Press the gages button again to advance to the
next screen.

3-61

Trip Odometer

3 (Trip Odometer): Press this button to access the
Odometer, Trip Distances, AVERAGE SPEED, and
TIME ELAPSED modes.
Odometer: When the trip odometer button is pressed,
the first menu displayed on the DIC screen is the
odometer reading, or cumulative mileage of the vehicle.
The odometer cannot be reset.
Press the trip odometer button again to advance to the
next menu.
Trip Distances: This menu shows the distances that
the vehicle has driven between specific points. The
trip odometer will record the number of miles up
to 9,999.9 miles or 9 999.9 km travelled for up to
two trips. When 9,999.9 miles or 9 999.9 km is reached
for either trip, the odometer for that trip will go back
to zero.
To reset the trip distances, use the following procedures:
1. Press the trip odometer button again to access
TRIP A. Press the trip odometer button again to
access TRIP B. To reset the trip odometer(s) back to
zero miles or to zero kilometers, access the trip that
needs to be reset and press the set/reset button.
2. Press the trip odometer button again to access
the odometer.
3-62

The trip odometer has a feature called the retro-active
reset. This can be used to set the trip odometer to
the number of miles (kilometers) driven since the ignition
was last turned on. This can be used if the trip
odometer is not reset at the beginning of the trip.
To use the retro-active reset feature, press and hold the
set/reset button for at least three seconds. The trip
odometer will display the number of miles or kilometers
driven since the ignition was last turned on and the
vehicle was moving. Once the vehicle begins moving,
the trip odometer will accumulate mileage. For example,
if the vehicle was driven 5.0 miles (8.0 km) before it
is started again, and then the retro-active reset feature
is activated, the display will show 5.0 miles (8.0 km).
As the vehicle begins moving, the display will then
increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km), 5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc.
If the retro-active reset feature is activated after the
vehicle is started, but before it begins moving, the
display will show the number of miles or kilometers that
were driven during the last ignition cycle.
Average Speed: The average speed is displayed in
miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h). The
average speed is calculated from the various vehicle
speeds recorded since the last reset of this menu item.
To reset the average speed, press the set/reset
button. The display will return to zero.
Press the trip odometer button again to advance to the
next screen.

Time Elapsed: This screen can be used as a
stopwatch. The display can show the hours, minutes
and seconds. The elapsed time indicator will record up
to 99 hours, 59 minutes and 59 seconds, then it will
reset to zero and continue counting.
To set the time elapsed function, use the following
procedures:
1. Press the set/reset button for less than two seconds
to start or stop the timer.
2. Press and hold the set/reset button for more than
two seconds to reset the timer back to zero.

Set/Reset

r (Set/Reset): Press this button to set or reset a
mode item when using the trip odometer or option
buttons.

Options

To set the date, use the following procedure:
1. Press the options button until the date is displayed
on the DIC.
2. Press the set/reset button to access the RESET
YEAR screen. The second position in the year
will be selected. Press and hold the set/reset button
to scroll through the available digits. Release the
button when the correct digit appears.
3. Press the options button to advance to the first
position in the year. Press and hold the set/reset
button to scroll through the available digits. Release
the button when the correct digit appears.
4. Press the options button to advance to the months
of the year.
5. Press the set/reset button to scroll through the
months of the year, releasing the button when
the correct month appears.

4 (Options): Press this button to access the Date,

6. Press the options button to advance to the days of
the month.

Language, Display Units, Daytime Display
Enhancements, Engine Oil Monitor System, Tire
Inflation Monitor System, Compass Calibration, and the
Personal Programming modes.

7. Press the set/reset button to scroll through the days
of the month, releasing the button when the correct
day appears.

Date: This menu sets the date.
The time is set through the radio. See Setting the Time
on page 3-96 for more information.

8. Press the options button again to advance to the
main date screen. The screen will now display the
new date.

3-63

Language: This menu allows selection of the language
in which the DIC messages will appear. The DIC can
be programmed in one of three languages: English,
French, or Spanish. The message on the HUD, if
equipped, will also appear in the language selected.
See Head-Up Display (HUD) on page 3-21.
To change the language, use the following procedure:
1. Press the options button to enter the
language screen.
2. Press the set/reset button to scroll through and set
the language choice.
3. Press the options button again to advance to the
next screen.
Display Units: This menu allows selection of
measurements to be displayed in English or metric
units. The messages on the HUD, if equipped, and the
instrument panel cluster will also appear in the type
of measurement selected.
To set the display units function, use the following
procedure:
1. Press the set/reset button to select ENGLISH
or METRIC.
2. Press the options button to advance to the
next screen.

3-64

DAYTIME DISPLAY ENHANCEMENTS: This menu
allows selection of the color of the display message.
When ON is selected for the daytime enhancement, the
messages will appear black on a red screen. This
combination makes it easier to see the DIC messages
during the daytime. When OFF is selected, or when
the headlamps are on, the messages will appear red on
a black background.
To set the daytime display enhancements function, use
the following procedure:
1. Press the set/reset button to select OFF or ON.
2. Press the options button to advance to the
next screen.
ENGINE OIL MONITOR SYSTEM: This menu allows
the engine oil monitor system to be reset. To reset
the engine oil monitor system, see Engine Oil Life
System on page 5-19.
Tire Inflation Monitor System: If the vehicle has ABS,
this menu allows the tire inflation monitor system to
be reset. See “Tire Inflation Monitor System” under
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-67 for more
information.

To set or reset the tire inflation monitor system, use the
following procedures:
1. Press the set/reset button to reset the tire inflation
monitor system. TIRE INFLATION HAS BEEN SET
will appear on the screen If the “Check Tire
Pressure” message, indicating an irregularity in the
pressure of one of the tires, had previously
appeared on the DIC. If the “Check Tire Pressure”
message did not appear, and the set/reset
button is pressed, the system will reset, but no
acknowledgment message will appear on
the screen.
2. Press the options button again to advance to the
next screen.
Select the set/reset button to return to the main
(date) screen.

Setting the Compass
The compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to manually set the compass.
However, under certain circumstances, such as during a
long distance cross-country trip, it will be necessary
to compensate for compass variance and reset the zone
through the DIC.
Compass variance is the difference between the earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. If not
adjusted to account for compass variance, the compass
in the vehicle could give false readings.
In order to do this, the compass must be set or
calibrated to the variance zone in which the vehicle
is travelling.

COMPASS CALIBRATION MODE: This menu allows
you to adjust for compass variance.

3-65

To adjust for compass variance, use the following
procedure:
1. Find the vehicle’s current location and variance
zone number on the map.

The direction the vehicle is moving will be displayed in
the bottom left corner of the screen, and will appear
in the gages, fuel, trip, and some of the options modes.
Press the options button again to advance to the
next screen.

Personal Programming Mode Screens
PERSONAL PROGRAMMING MODE: This menu
allows you to customize several features on your
vehicle. These adjustments can only be made while the
vehicle is in PARK (P). Press the set/reset button to
display the first screen.
Press the options button to access these modes:
EXTERIOR LIGHTING DELAY: This screen allows this
feature to be turned off, or allows the selection of the
number of seconds the headlamps, sidelamps, taillamps,
fog lamps, and back-up lamps are turned on after the
key is removed from the ignition, or the vehicle is
unlocked using the remote keyless entry transmitter.
If OFF is selected, the exterior lamps will not turn on.
2. Press the set/reset button to scroll through and
select the appropriate variance zone.
3. Press the options button to advance to the
calibration screen.
4. Drive the vehicle in a circle two times to activate
the compass.
3-66

If a time delay is chosen, the lamps will turn on for
the selected time. The time delay will be cancelled and
the exterior lamps will turn on automatically when
the key is removed from the ignition, or the vehicle is
unlocked using the remote keyless entry transmitter.

To program this mode, use the following procedure:
1. Press and release the set/reset button to scroll to
the selection you want to program. Choose from
OFF, 15, 30, 60, or 90 seconds.
2. Press the options button again to advance to the
next screen.

If OFF is selected, removing the key from the ignition
will not cause the interior lamps to turn on.
If ON is selected, removing the key from the ignition will
cause the interior lamps to be turned on for about
25 seconds.
To program this mode, use the following procedure:

INTERIOR LIGHTS WHEN DOOR CLOSED: This
screen allows this feature to be turned OFF or ON.

1. Press and release the set/reset button to scroll to
either OFF or ON.

If OFF is selected, the interior lamps will turn off
immediately when the ignition is turned off and the last
open door is closed.

2. Press the options button again to advance to the
next screen.

If ON is selected, the interior lamps will stay on for
about 25 seconds after the vehicle’s ignition is off and
the last open door is closed.
To program this mode, use the following procedure:
1. Press and release the set/reset button to scroll to
either OFF or ON.
2. Press the options button again to advance to the
next screen.
INTERIOR LIGHTS WHEN KEY REMOVED: This
screen allows this feature to be turned OFF or ON. This
feature enables the interior lamps in the vehicle to
turn on for about 25 seconds after the key is removed
from the ignition.

AUTO DOOR LOCK: This screen allows this feature to
be turned OFF or ON.
If OFF is selected, all automatic door locking is disabled.
The doors will always need to be locked manually
before driving, to increase occupant safety.
If ON is selected, the vehicle’s doors automatically lock
when the doors are closed and the vehicle is shifted
into DRIVE (D).
To program this mode, use the following procedure:
1. Press and release the set/reset button to scroll to
either OFF or ON.
2. Press the options button again to advance to the
next screen.

3-67

AUTO DOOR UNLOCK: This screen can be used if
ON was selected for the AUTO DOOR LOCK feature.
This screen allows this feature to be turned off, used for
the driver’s door only, or for all the doors.
If OFF is selected, none of the doors will unlock when
the vehicle’s transaxle is shifted into PARK (P).
If DRIVER is selected, only the driver’s door will unlock
when the vehicle’s transaxle is shifted into PARK (P).
If ALL is selected, all the doors will unlock when
the vehicle’s transaxle is shifted into PARK (P).
To program this mode, use the following procedure:
1. Press and release the set/reset button to scroll to
either OFF, DRIVER, or ALL.
2. Press the options button again to advance to the
next screen.
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK ON: If DRIVER or ALL was
selected on the AUTO DOOR UNLOCK screen,
this screen allows selection of when the vehicle’s doors
will unlock. The choices are when the key is removed
from the ignition or when the vehicle is shifted into
PARK (P).
If KEY-OUT is selected, the auto door unlock will
function when the key is taken out of the ignition.

3-68

If PARK is selected, the auto door unlock will function
when the transaxle is shifted into PARK (P).
To program this mode, use the following procedure:
1. Press and release the set/reset button to scroll to
either KEY-OUT or PARK.
2. Press the options button again to advance to the
next screen.
DELAYED LOCKING: This screen allows this feature
to be turned OFF or ON. The key must be out of
the ignition for this feature to work.
If OFF is selected, there will be no delayed locking of
the vehicle’s doors.
If ON is selected, the locking of the vehicle’s doors will
be delayed by five seconds after a power door lock
switch is pressed while the door is open, or the LOCK
button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is
pressed while any door is open.
To program this mode, use the following procedure:
1. Press and release the set/reset button to scroll to
either OFF or ON.
2. Press the options button again to advance to the
next screen.

REMOTE LOCKS FEEDBACK: This screen allows
this option to be turned OFF, or gives the choice of
two methods of verification, LIGHTS or LIGHTS
and HORN, that indicate the vehicle’s doors are locked
when the LOCK button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter is pressed.

THEFT DETERRENT: The vehicle may have a content
theft-deterrent system. Once it is turned on, the
system will activate if someone tries to enter the vehicle
without using the remote keyless entry transmitter or
the correct key. This screen allows this feature to
be turned OFF or ON.

If OFF is selected, this feature will not be programmed.

If OFF is selected, the content theft-deterrent system
will not function.

If LIGHTS is selected, the exterior lamps will flash
when the LOCK button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter is pressed.
If LIGHTS and HORN is selected, the exterior lamps will
flash when the LOCK button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter is pressed, and the horn will sound
when the LOCK button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter is pressed again within five seconds of the
previous command.
To program this mode, use the following procedure:
1. Press the set/reset button to scroll to OFF, LIGHTS,
or LIGHTS and HORN.
2. Press the options button again to advance to the
next screen.
If the vehicle does not have a content theft-deterrent
system, the next screens with PROGRAMMING
FINISHED and DISPLAY OFF will appear.

If ON is selected, the content theft-deterrent system will
be activated.
To program this mode, use the following procedure:
1. Press the set/reset button to scroll to OFF or ON.
2. Press the options button again to advance to
the next screen.
KEY CYLINDER DISARM: This screen allows this
feature to be turned OFF or ON. This mode arms the
vehicle’s ignition so that if a key other than the one that
came with the vehicle is used to try to start it, the
horn will sound.
If OFF is selected, the content theft-deterrent system
will not disarm when the vehicle is unlocked using
the door lock, or if someone tampers with the door lock.

If the vehicle does have a content theft-deterrent
system, the next screen will appear.
3-69

If ON is selected, the content theft-deterrent system will
disarm when the vehicle is unlocked using the door
key. This makes the vehicle more resistant to key
lock tampering.
1. Press the set/reset button to scroll to OFF or ON.

REMOTE START: If your vehicle has the remote start
feature, this screen allows it to be turned OFF or
ON. The remote start feature allows you to start the
engine from outside of the vehicle using your remote
keyless entry transmitter. See “Remote Vehicle
Start” under Remote Keyless Entry System Operation
on page 2-4 for more information.

2. Press the options button again to advance to
the next screen.

If OFF is selected, the remote start feature will
be disabled.

To program this mode, use the following procedure:

LOCK SWITCH ARM: If the vehicle has the content
theft-deterrent system and ON was selected on the
THEFT DETERRENT screen, this screen allows this
feature to be turned OFF or ON.
If OFF is selected, the content theft-deterrent system will
not activate this feature, which arms the system when the
doors are locked with the door lock switch.
If ON is selected, the content theft-deterrent system will
arm when the doors are locked with the door lock switch.
The key must be removed from the ignition when the
doors are locked or the content theft-deterrent system will
not arm.
To program this mode, use the following procedure:
1. Press the set/reset button to scroll to OFF or ON.
2. Press the options button again to advance to
the next screen.

3-70

If ON is selected, the remote start feature will
be enabled.
To program this mode, use the following procedure:
1. Press the set/reset button to scroll to OFF or ON.
2. Press the options button again to advance to
the next screen.
PROGRAMMING FINISHED will appear on the next
screen. This confirms that the personal options
programming is complete.
DISPLAY OFF will appear on the next screen. This
screen will count down and then go blank. Press
the options button to advance to a new screen.

Fuel

. (Fuel): Press this button to access the Average
Fuel Economy, Instantaneous Fuel Economy, and Fuel
Range modes.
AVG ECONOMY (Average Fuel Economy): This
screen will display the approximate average miles per
gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km). This
number is calculated based on the number of mpg
(L/100 km) recorded since the last time this menu item
was reset.
To reset the average fuel economy for the vehicle,
follow this procedure:
1. Press the set/reset button to reset to zero.
2. Press the fuel button again to advance to the
next screen.

RANGE: This screen displays the approximate number
of remaining miles or kilometers the vehicle can be
driven without refueling. This estimate is based on the
average fuel economy for the amount of fuel remaining
in the fuel tank and the current driving conditions.
This estimate will change if driving conditions change.
For example, if driving in traffic and making frequent
stops, the display may read one number, but if the
vehicle is driven on a freeway the number may change
even though the same amount of fuel is in the fuel
tank. This is because different driving conditions produce
different fuel economies. Generally, freeway driving
produces better fuel economy than city driving.
If the fuel tank contains less than 2 gallons (7.6 L), the
LOW FUEL message will appear on the DIC screen.
Fill the fuel tank as soon as possible to avoid running
out of fuel. See “Low Fuel” under DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-72.

INST ECONOMY (Instantaneous Fuel
Economy): This screen displays the current fuel
economy at a particular moment and will change
frequently as driving conditions change. Unlike average
fuel economy, this screen cannot be reset.
Press the fuel button again to advance to the next
screen.

3-71

DIC Warnings and Messages

A/C OFF FOR ENGINE PROTECTION

These messages will appear if there is a problem in
one of the vehicle’s systems. They will override
any other mode or screen the Driver Information
Center (DIC) may be in.

This warning message comes on when the engine
coolant becomes hotter than the normal operating
temperature. To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the
air conditioning compressor is automatically turned
off. When the coolant temperature returns to normal, the
air conditioning compressor will turn back on. The
vehicle can then continue to be driven.

Some messages can be cleared from the DIC screen.
In order to do this the message must be acknowledged.
To acknowledge or clear the message from the
screen, press the set/reset button on the DIC. See DIC
Controls and Displays (Base Level DIC) on page 3-52
or DIC Controls and Displays (Uplevel DIC with
Trip Computer) on page 3-60 for DIC button
descriptions.
Other warning messages are not allowed to be cleared
until the problem indicated by the warning message
is taken care of. When the problem indicated by
the message is resolved, it can be acknowledged and
the screen can be reset.
Be sure to take any message that appears on the DIC
screen seriously and remember that clearing the
messages that are able to be acknowledged, will only
make the message disappear, not the problem.

3-72

This message comes on while the ignition is in RUN. A
chime will sound for two seconds when this message
is displayed. Press the set/reset button to acknowledge
this warning message and to clear it from the screen.
This message will continue to display for three seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It will also re-display for three seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition
still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.

AJAR

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
This symbol appears
with the AJAR
warning message.

This warning message comes on when a door, the
trunk, or the hood of the vehicle is not properly closed.
The graphic will highlight the hood or trunk if either
one is not closed properly. The graphic will indicate a
highlighted, open door to show which door or doors are
not properly closed.
This message will display while the ignition is in RUN. A
chime will sound for two seconds when the ignition is
shifted out of PARK (P). Press the set/reset button
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from the
screen.
This message will continue to display for three seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It will also re-display for three seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition
still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.

This message appears when the system detects that
the battery voltage is dropping beyond a reasonable
level. The battery saver system will start reducing certain
features of the vehicle which you may not be able to
notice. At the point that the features are disabled,
this message is displayed. It means that the vehicle is
trying to save the charge in the battery. Turn off all
unnecessary accessories to allow the battery to
recharge. The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to
15.5 volts. If you have the uplevel DIC, you can monitor
battery voltage on the DIC by pressing the gages
button until BATTERY appears.

CHANGE OIL SOON
This symbol comes on with
the CHANGE OIL SOON
warning message.

This warning message indicates that service is required
for the vehicle. See your GM dealer. See Engine Oil
on page 5-16 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
for more information.
3-73

The CHANGE OIL SOON message is reset by
acknowledging the message. The ENGINE OIL
MONITOR SYSTEM screen under the options menu on
the DIC must also be reset. See “Engine Oil Monitor
System” in options under DIC Controls and Displays
(Base Level DIC) on page 3-52 or DIC Controls
and Displays (Uplevel DIC with Trip Computer) on
page 3-60 for more information.
This message will display while the ignition is in RUN.
Press the set/reset button to acknowledge this message
and to clear it from the screen.
This message will continue to display for three seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It will also re-display for three seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition
still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.

CHARGING SYSTEM FAILURE
This symbol comes on
with the CHARGING
SYSTEM FAILURE
warning message.

This warning message indicates that there is a problem
with the generator and battery charging systems.
Have the electrical system checked by your GM dealer
as soon as possible.
This message will display while the ignition is in RUN. A
chime will sound for two seconds when this message
is displayed. Press the set/reset button to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
This message will continue to display if it has not been
acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will
also re-display for three seconds if the message has
been acknowledged, but the condition still exists
when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.

3-74

CHECK GAS CAP
This warning message comes on when the gas cap is
not on, or is not fully tightened. Check the gas cap
to ensure it is on and properly tightened. The diagnostic
system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off
or improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap
will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few
driving trips with the cap properly installed should
turn this message off. See Filling the Tank on page 5-7
for more information.
This message will display while the ignition is in RUN. A
chime will sound for two seconds when this message
is displayed and then the message continues to display.
Press the set/reset button to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
This message will continue to display for three seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It will also re-display for three seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition
still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.

CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
This symbol comes
on with the CHECK
TIRE PRESSURE
warning message.

If the vehicle has ABS brakes, this warning message
will appear when the air pressure in one of the tires
is too low or too high. Check the vehicle’s tire pressure
as soon as possible, and fill or deflate the affected
tire to the appropriate level. The correct tire inflation
pressure should be set to those shown on the
tire-loading information label on the vehicle. See
Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-33 for more information.
The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE screen is reset when
it is acknowledged. However, the TIRE INFLATION
MONITOR SYSTEM screen, located under the option
menu in the DIC, must also be reset. See “Tire Inflation
Monitor System” in the options section under DIC
Controls and Displays (Base Level DIC) on page 3-52
or DIC Controls and Displays (Uplevel DIC with Trip
Computer) on page 3-60 for more information.

3-75

This message will display while the ignition is in RUN. A
chime will sound for two seconds when this message
is displayed. Press the set/reset button to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
This message will continue to display for three seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It will also re-display for three seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition
still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.

CRUISE SET
This symbol comes
on with the CRUISE
SET message.

cruise control is set. See Cruise Control Light on
page 3-51. CRUISE SET will also appear briefly in the
Head-Up Display (HUD), if your vehicle has this feature.
This message will display when the ignition is in RUN.
See Cruise Control on page 3-11 for more information.
This message does not need to be acknowledged.

DELAYED LOCKING
This message comes on when the doors of the vehicle
are closed and the delayed locking feature has been
programmed through the DIC. See “Delayed Locking” in
the options menu under DIC Controls and Displays
(Base Level DIC) on page 3-52 or DIC Controls
and Displays (Uplevel DIC with Trip Computer) on
page 3-60 for more information.
This message will appear when the ignition is in OFF. A
chime will sound for two seconds when this message
is displayed.
This message cannot be acknowledged.

This message and symbol come on briefly whenever
the cruise control is set. The cruise control light on the
instrument panel cluster will also come on when

3-76

HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED

HOT COOLANT

This message comes on when the amount of available
light outside the vehicle is low and the exterior lamps
control has been turned off. This condition happens
when the headlamps are turned off at night or the
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) are turned off during the
day. This message informs the driver that it has
become dark enough outside to require the headlamps
to be turned on. When the headlamps are turned
on, this message will clear from the screen. See Exterior
Lamps on page 3-15 and Daytime Running Lamps
(DRL) on page 3-16 for more information.

Notice: If the HOT COOLANT warning message
appears on the DIC display, stop the vehicle as soon
as possible. Do not increase the engine speed
above normal idling speed. Severe engine damage
can result from driving a vehicle with an overheated
engine. See Engine Overheating on page 5-28 for
more information.
This symbol comes on with
the HOT COOLANT
warning message.

This message will display while the ignition is in RUN. A
chime will sound for two seconds when this message
is displayed. Press the set/reset button to acknowledge
this warning message and to clear it from the screen.
This message will continue to display if it has not been
acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will
also re-display for three seconds if the message has
been acknowledged, but the condition still exists
when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.

This warning message will appear while the engine
coolant temperature is too hot. The hot coolant
temperature warning light will also appear on the
instrument panel cluster. Also, the engine coolant
temperature gage will read in the red or hot area. See
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light on
page 3-46 and Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on
page 3-46 for more information.
To avoid added strain, turn off the air conditioner if it is
on. When the coolant temperature returns to normal,
the air conditioner can be turned back on.
3-77

This message will display only while the ignition is in
RUN. A chime will sound continuously when this
message is displayed. Press the set/reset button to
acknowledge this message and to clear it from
the screen.

HOT TRANS FLUID
This symbol comes on with
the HOT TRANS FLUID
warning message.

This message will continue to display if it has not been
acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will
also re-display for three seconds if the message has
been acknowledged, but the condition still exists
when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.

HOT ENGINE OIL. REDUCE SPEED
On some vehicles, this warning message comes on
when the vehicle’s engine oil is above the proper engine
operating temperature. Reduce the speed of the
vehicle. If the warning message continues to display,
have the vehicle serviced by your GM dealer as soon as
possible. A chime will sound continuously when this
message is displayed. Press the set/reset button
to acknowledge this warning message. This clears it
from the screen.
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.

3-78

This warning message will appear when the transaxle
fluid in the vehicle is too hot. Stop the vehicle and allow
it to idle until it cools down. If the warning message
continues to display, have the vehicle serviced by your
GM dealer as soon as possible.
If the vehicle has the Uplevel Trip Computer DIC, you
can determine the actual temperature of the transaxle
fluid using the vehicle’s gages button. See DIC Controls
and Displays (Base Level DIC) on page 3-52 or DIC
Controls and Displays (Uplevel DIC with Trip Computer)
on page 3-60 for more information.
This message will display while the ignition is in RUN. A
chime will sound for two seconds when this message
is displayed. Press the set/reset button to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.

This message will continue to display if it has not been
acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will
also re-display for three seconds if the message has
been acknowledged, but the condition still exists
when the engine is turned off.

This message will continue to display if it has not been
acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will
also re-display for three seconds if the message has
been acknowledged, but the condition still exists
when the engine is turned off.

If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.

The message will re-appear when the engine is turned
on and the condition still exists.

KEY FOB BATTERY LOW

KEY IN IGNITION

This symbol comes on with
the KEY FOB BATTERY
LOW warning message.

This warning message comes on and a chime will
sound continuously when the driver exits the vehicle
while the key is in the ignition after the engine is
turned off.
This message cannot be acknowledged.
This message will disappear and the chiming will stop
when the key is removed from the ignition.

This warning message will appear when the battery in
the remote keyless entry transmitter needs to be
replaced. See Remote Keyless Entry System Operation
on page 2-4 for more information.
This message will display while the ignition is in RUN. A
chime will sound for two seconds when this message
is displayed. Press the set/reset button to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.

LEFT FRONT TURN LAMP OUT
This warning message comes on when the left front turn
signal lamp needs to be replaced. See Taillamps,
Turn Signal, and Stoplamps on page 5-57 for
replacement procedures.
This message will display while the ignition is in RUN. A
chime will sound for two seconds when this message
is displayed. Press the set/reset button to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.

3-79

This message will continue to display if it has not been
acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will
also re-display for three seconds if the message has
been acknowledged, but the condition still exists
when the engine is turned off.

LOW BRAKE FLUID
This symbol comes on with
the LOW BRAKE FLUID
warning message.

If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.

LEFT REAR TURN LAMP OUT
This warning message comes on when the left rear turn
signal lamp needs to be replaced. See Taillamps,
Turn Signal, and Stoplamps on page 5-57 for
replacement procedures.
This message will display while the ignition is in RUN. A
chime will sound for two seconds when this message
is displayed. Press the set/reset button to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
This message will continue to display if it has not been
acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will
also re-display for three seconds if the message has
been acknowledged, but the condition still exists
when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.

This warning message will appear when the brake fluid
level is low. Have the brake system serviced by your
GM dealer as soon as possible. See Brakes on
page 5-42.
The brake light will also appear on the instrument panel
cluster when this message appears on the DIC. See
Brake System Warning Light on page 3-42.
This message will display only while the ignition is
in RUN. A chime will sound for two seconds while
this message is displayed. Press the set/reset button
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from
the screen.
This message will continue to display if it has not been
acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will
also re-display for three seconds if the message has
been acknowledged, but the condition still exists
when the engine is turned off.
If the condition exists, the message will re-appear when
the engine is turned on.

3-80

LOW FUEL

LOW OIL LEVEL
This symbol comes on
with the LOW FUEL
warning message.

This warning message will appear when the vehicle is
low on fuel. Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible.
This message will display while the ignition is in RUN. A
chime will sound for two seconds when this message
is displayed. Press the set/reset button to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
This message will continue to display if it has not been
acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will
also re-display for three seconds if the message has
been acknowledged, but the condition still exists
when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.

This symbol comes on with
the LOW OIL LEVEL
warning message.

On some vehicles, this warning message appears when
the vehicle’s engine oil is low. Fill the oil to the proper
level as soon as possible. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for engine oil fill location. Also,
see Engine Oil on page 5-16 for information on the
kind of oil to use and proper oil level. See Supercharger
Oil on page 5-20 if the vehicle has a supercharged
engine for information on the kind of oil to use
and proper oil level.
This message will display while the ignition is in RUN. A
chime will sound for two seconds when this message
is displayed. Press the set/reset button to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
This message will continue to display if it has not been
acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will
also re-display for three seconds if the message has
been acknowledged, but the condition still exists
when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.
3-81

LOW OIL PRESSURE
Notice: If the LOW OIL PRESSURE warning
message appears on the DIC display, stop the
vehicle immediately. Do not drive the vehicle until
the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.
Severe engine damage can result from driving a
vehicle with low oil pressure. See Engine Oil
on page 5-16 for more information.
This symbol comes on with
the LOW OIL PRESSURE
warning message.

This warning message will appear when the vehicle’s
engine oil pressure is low. The low oil pressure warning
light will also appear on the instrument panel.
Stop the vehicle immediately, as engine damage can
result from driving a vehicle with low oil pressure. Have
the vehicle serviced by your GM dealer as soon as
possible when this warning message is displayed.
This message will display only while the ignition is in
RUN. A chime will sound continuously when this
message is displayed. Press the set/reset button to
acknowledge this message and to clear it from
the screen.
3-82

This message will continue to display if it has not been
acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will
also re-display for three seconds if the message has
been acknowledged, but the condition still exists
when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.

LOW WASHER FLUID
This symbol comes on with
the LOW WASHER FLUID
warning message.

This warning message appears when the windshield
washer fluid is low. Fill the windshield washer reservoir
as soon as possible. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for location of the windshield
washer reservoir. Also, see Windshield Washer Fluid on
page 5-41 for more information.
This message will display only while the ignition is in
RUN. A chime will sound for two seconds when
this message is displayed. Press the set/reset button
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from
the screen.

This message will continue to display if it has not been
acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will
also re-display for three seconds if the message has
been acknowledged, but the condition still exists
when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.

PARKING BRAKE ON
This symbol comes on with
the PARKING BRAKE ON
warning message.

The brake light will also appear on the instrument panel
cluster when this message appears on the DIC.
A chime will sound continuously while this message is
displayed if driving above 5 mph (8 km/h). Press
the set/reset button to acknowledge this message and
to clear it from the screen.
This message will continue to display for three seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It will also re-display for three seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition
still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.

PARK LAMPS ON
This warning message appears to alert the driver when
the vehicle’s parking brake is on, the ignition is in
RUN, and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph
(8 km/h). See Parking Brake on page 2-30 for more
information.

This warning message will come on to alert the driver
when the parking lamps are on, the ignition is in
OFF, and the key is removed. A chime will sound
continuously while this message is displayed. This
message cannot be acknowledged.

3-83

REDUCED ENGINE POWER
This symbol comes on with
the REDUCED ENGINE
POWER warning message.

REMOTE START ACTIVE PRESS
HAZARD SWITCH TO CANCEL
This warning message will come on when a remote
start is initiated. If you would like to cancel the remote
start, turn on the hazard warning flashers. See
Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3-6.

REMOTE START DISABLED
This warning message appears when the vehicle’s
engine power is reduced. If this happens during driving
conditions, such as climbing a steep hill, the transaxle
may overwork in a gear that may cause damage to the
vehicle’s engine or transaxle. Reduced engine power
can affect the vehicle’s ability to accelerate.
This message will display only when the ignition is in
RUN. A chime will sound for two seconds while
this message is displayed. Press the set/reset button
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from
the screen.
This message will continue to display if it has not been
acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will
also re-display for three seconds if the message has
been acknowledged, but the condition still exists
when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.
3-84

This warning message will come on if a remote start
attempt is unsuccessful. This may be caused if any of
the following conditions are true when a remote
start attempt is made:
• The remote start system is disabled through
the DIC.
• The key is in the ignition.
• The hood or the doors are not closed.
• There is an emission control system malfunction.
• The engine coolant temperature is too high.
• The oil pressure is low.
• The hazard warning flashers are turned on.
• The maximum number of remote starts or remote
start attempts between ignition cycles has been
reached.
• The content theft-deterrent alarm is on while
attempting to remote start the vehicle.

See “REMOTE START” under DIC Controls and
Displays (Base Level DIC) on page 3-52 or DIC Controls
and Displays (Uplevel DIC with Trip Computer) on
page 3-60 and “Remote Vehicle Start” under Remote
Keyless Entry System Operation on page 2-4 for
more information.

RIGHT REAR TURN LAMP OUT

RIGHT FRONT TURN LAMP OUT

This message will display only while the ignition is in
RUN. A chime will sound for two seconds while
this message is displayed. Press the set/reset button
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from
the screen.

This warning message will come on when the vehicle’s
right front turn signal needs to be replaced. See
Front Turn Signal, Parking and Fog Lamps on page 5-56
for bulb replacement procedures.
This message will display only while the ignition is in
RUN. A chime will sound for two seconds while
this message is displayed. Press the set/reset button
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from
the screen.
This message will continue to display if it has not been
acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will
also re-display for three seconds if the message has
been acknowledged, but the condition still exists
when the engine is turned off.

This warning message will come on when the vehicle’s
right rear turn signal needs to be replaced. See
Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps on page 5-57 for
bulb replacement procedures.

This message will continue to display if it has not been
acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will
also re-display for three seconds if the message has
been acknowledged, but the condition still exists
when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.

If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.

3-85

SERVICE ABS SYSTEM

SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM

This symbol comes on with
the SERVICE ABS
SYSTEM warning
message.

This symbol comes on with
the SERVICE BRAKE
SYSTEM warning
message.

If the vehicle has the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),
this warning message will appear when the vehicle’s
brakes are not functioning properly. Have the brake
system serviced by your GM dealer as soon as possible.

This warning message will appear when the vehicle’s
brakes are not functioning properly. Have the brake
system serviced by your GM dealer as soon as possible.

This message will display only while the ignition is in
RUN. A chime will sound for two seconds while
this message is displayed. Press the set/reset button
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from
the screen.
This message will continue to display if it has not been
acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will
also re-display for three seconds if the message has
been acknowledged, but the condition still exists
when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.

3-86

This message will display only while the ignition is in
RUN. A chime will sound for two seconds while
this message is displayed. Press the set/reset button
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from
the screen.
This message will continue to display if it has not been
acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will
also re-display for three seconds if the message has
been acknowledged, but the condition still exists
when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.

SERVICE BRAKE APPLY SENSOR

SERVICE PARK LAMPS

This message will come on when the brake apply sensor
is not functioning properly. The vehicle still has brakes
when this warning message displays, but you should
have the vehicle serviced by your GM dealer as soon
as possible.

This warning message will come on if one of the
vehicle’s parking lamps needs to be replaced. See Front
Turn Signal, Parking and Fog Lamps on page 5-56 for
bulb replacement procedures.

This message will display only while the ignition is in
RUN. A chime will sound for two seconds while
this message is displayed. Press the set/reset button
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from
the screen.
This message will continue to display if it has not been
acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will
also re-display for three seconds if the message has
been acknowledged, but the condition still exists
when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.

This message will display only while the ignition is in
RUN. A chime will sound for two seconds while
this message is displayed. Press the set/reset button
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from
the screen.
This message will continue to display if it has not been
acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will
also re-display for three seconds if the message has
been acknowledged, but the condition still exists
when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.

3-87

SERVICE STABILITY SYSTEM
This symbol comes on with
the SERVICE STABILITY
SYSTEM warning
message.

If the vehicle has the StabiliTrak® Plus system, this
warning message will appear when it is not functioning
properly. A warning light will also appear on the
instrument panel cluster. See Traction Control System
(TCS) Warning Light on page 3-45 or Enhanced Traction
System Warning Light on page 3-45. See StabiliTrak®
Plus System on page 4-12 for more information.
Have the StabiliTrak® Plus system serviced by your
GM dealer as soon as possible.

3-88

This message will display only while the ignition is in
RUN. A chime will sound for two seconds while
this message is displayed. Press the set/reset button
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from
the screen.
This message will continue to display if it has not been
acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will
also re-display for three seconds if the message has
been acknowledged, but the condition still exists
when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.

SERVICE THEFT SYSTEM
This warning message comes on if there is a problem
with the theft-deterrent system programmed in the
key. A fault has been detected in the system which
means that the system is disabled and it is not protecting
the vehicle. The vehicle usually restarts; however, you
may want to take the vehicle to your GM dealer
before turning off the engine. See Keys on page 2-2 for
information on the PASS-Key® III system.
This message will display only while the ignition is in
RUN. A chime will sound for two seconds while this
message is displayed. Press the set/reset button to
acknowledge this message and to clear it from the
screen.
This message will continue to display if it has not been
acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will
also re-display for three seconds if the message has
been acknowledged, but the condition still exists
when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.

SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEM
This symbol will come on
with the SERVICE
TRACTION SYSTEM
warning message.

If the vehicle has the traction control system, this
warning message appears when the system is not
functioning properly. A warning light will also appear on
the instrument panel cluster. See Traction Control
System (TCS) Warning Light on page 3-45 or Enhanced
Traction System Warning Light on page 3-45. See
Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-9 for more
information. Have the traction control system serviced by
your GM dealer as soon as possible.
This message will display only while the ignition is in
RUN. A chime will sound for two seconds while
this message is displayed. Press the set/reset button
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from
the screen.

3-89

This message will continue to display if it has not been
acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will
also re-display for three seconds if the message has
been acknowledged, but the condition still exists
when the engine is turned off.

This message will display only while the ignition is in
RUN. A chime will sound for two seconds while
this message is displayed. Press the set/reset button
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from
the screen.

If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.

This message will continue to display if it has not been
acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will
also re-display for three seconds if the message has
been acknowledged, but the condition still exists
when the engine is turned off.

SERVICE VARIABLE EFFORT
STEERING
This symbol comes on with
the SERVICE VARIABLE
EFFORT STEERING
warning message.

If the vehicle has the variable effort steering system,
this warning message will display if this system is
not functioning properly. See Steering on page 4-13 for
more information. Have your system serviced by
your GM dealer as soon as possible.

3-90

If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.

SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
This symbol comes on with
the SERVICE VEHICLE
SOON warning message.

This warning message displays when a non-emissions
related malfunction occurs. Have the vehicle serviced
by your GM dealer as soon as possible.
This message will display only while the ignition is in
RUN. A chime will sound for two seconds while
this message is displayed. Press the set/reset button
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from
the screen.
This message will continue to display if it has not been
acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will
also re-display for three seconds if the message has
been acknowledged, but the condition still exists
when the engine is turned off.

STABILITY CONTROL ACTIVE
This symbol comes on with
the STABILITY CONTROL
ACTIVE warning
message.

If the vehicle has the StabiliTrak® Plus system, this
warning message appears when the system is engaged
and actively assisting the driver with directional
control of the vehicle. Slippery road conditions may exist
when this warning message is displayed, so driving
should be adjusted accordingly. STABILITY CONTROL
ACTIVE will also appear in the Head-Up Display
(HUD), if your vehicle has this feature.
This message will display only while the ignition is in
RUN. This message stays on until road conditions
change and StabiliTrak® Plus is not active.
This message cannot be acknowledged and cleared
from the screen.

If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.

3-91

STABILITY CONTROL OFF
This symbol comes on with
the STABILITY CONTROL
OFF warning message.

Any of the following conditions may cause the
StabiliTrak® Plus system to turn off:

• The StabiliTrak® Plus system on the GXP option is
manually turned off. See StabiliTrak® Plus System
on page 4-12 for more information.

• The battery is low.
• There is a StabiliTrak® Plus system failure. See
your GM dealer for service.
If the vehicle has the StabiliTrak® Plus system, this
warning message will appear when the system turns off.
This message will display only while the ignition is in
RUN. A chime will sound once and the message
will stay on for three seconds and then disappear. A
warning light indicating that this system is deactivated
will also appear on the instrument panel cluster.
See Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light on
page 3-45 or Enhanced Traction System Warning Light
on page 3-45.
When the StabiliTrak® Plus system is off, the system
will not be engaged and will not actively assist the driver
with directional control of the vehicle. See StabiliTrak®
Plus System on page 4-12.

3-92

STARTING DISABLED DUE TO
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL
This warning message comes on when there is a
malfunction with the electronic throttle control which
prevents the vehicle from starting. Have the vehicle
serviced by your GM dealer.
This message will only appear while the ignition is in
RUN, and will not disappear until the problem is
resolved. A chime will sound for two seconds. This
message cannot be acknowledged.

STARTING DISABLED DUE TO THEFT
SYSTEM

This message only displays while the ignition is in RUN
and will not disappear until driving conditions change
and the traction control is no longer active.

This warning message comes on when the system
detects a malfunction in the content theft-deterrent
system and prevents the vehicle from starting.

This message cannot be acknowledged or cleared from
the screen.

This message will only appear while the ignition is in
RUN, and will not disappear until the problem is
resolved. A chime will sound for two seconds. This
message cannot be acknowledged.

TRACTION CONTROL ACTIVE

TRACTION CONTROL OFF
This symbol comes on with
the TRACTION CONTROL
OFF message.

This symbol comes on with
the TRACTION CONTROL
ACTIVE message.

If the vehicle has the traction control system, this
message will appear when the system is on. TRACTION
CONTROL ACTIVE will also appear in the Head-Up
Display (HUD), if your vehicle has this feature.

If the vehicle has the traction control system, this
message will appear when the traction control system
turns off. TRACTION CONTROL OFF will also appear in
the Head-Up Display (HUD), if your vehicle has this
feature. This message will only display while the ignition
is in RUN and will disappear after three seconds. A
chime will sound once and the message will stay on for
three seconds and then disappear. A warning light
indicating that this system is deactivated will also appear
on the instrument panel cluster. See Traction Control
System (TCS) Warning Light on page 3-45 or Enhanced
Traction System Warning Light on page 3-45.
3-93

Any of the following conditions may cause the traction
control system to turn off:

• The traction control system is turned off by pressing
the TC (traction control) button located on the
center console. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 4-9 or Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
on page 4-11 for more information.

• The battery is low.
• There is a traction control system failure. See your
GM dealer for service.

TURN SIGNAL ON
This message comes on if the vehicle is driven for more
than 0.75 mile (1.21 km) while one of the turn signals
are on. It appears as a reminder to turn off the turn
signal.
This message only displays when the ignition is in RUN.
A chime will sound for two seconds and the message
will not disappear until the turn signal is manually turned
off, or a turn is completed.

3-94

Audio System(s)
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then read
the pages following to familiarize yourself with its
features.
Driving without distraction is a necessity for a safer
driving experience. See Defensive Driving on page 4-2.
By taking a few moments to read this manual and
get familiar with your vehicle’s audio system, you can
use it with less effort, as well as take advantage of
its features. While your vehicle is parked, set up your
audio system by presetting your favorite radio stations,
setting the tone and adjusting the speakers. Then,
when driving conditions permit, you can tune to your
favorite stations using the presets and steering
wheel controls (if equipped).

{CAUTION:
This system provides you with a far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
tasks while driving can cause a crash and you
or others can be injured or killed. Always keep
your eyes on the road and your mind on the
drive — avoid engaging in extended searching
while driving.

Keeping your mind on the drive is important for safe
driving. For more information, see Defensive Driving on
page 4-2. Get familiar with your vehicle’s audio
system so you can use it with less effort and take full
advantage of its features.

Added sound equipment may interfere with the
operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or other
systems, and even damage them. Your vehicle’s
systems may interfere with the operation of sound
equipment that has been added.

Here are some ways in which you can help avoid
distraction while driving.

Notice: The chime signals related to seat belts,
parking brake, and other functions of your vehicle
operate through the GM radio/entertainment system.
If that equipment is replaced or additional
equipment is added to your vehicle, the chimes may
not work. Make sure that replacement or additional
equipment is compatible with your vehicle before
installing it. See Accessories and Modifications on
page 5-3.

While your vehicle is parked:

• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
• Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering wheel
controls (if equipped).
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player,
CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make
sure that it can be added by checking with your
dealer. Also, check federal rules covering mobile
radio and telephone units. If sound equipment can
be added, it is very important to do it properly.

Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be
played even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-22 for more
information.

3-95

Setting the Time

Radio with CD (Base Level)

The radio may have a button marked with an H or HR
to represent hours and an M or MIN to represent
minutes.
Press and hold the hour button until the correct hour
appears on the display. AM will appear for morning
hours. Press and hold the minute button until the correct
minute appears on the display. The time can be set
with the ignition on or off.
To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting
Radio Data System (RDS) information, press and
hold the hour and minute buttons at the same time until
UPDATED appears on the display. If the time is not
available from the station, NO UPDATE will appear on
the display.
RDS time is broadcast once a minute. After tuning to an
RDS broadcast station, it may take a few minutes for
the time to update.

Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:

• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming

• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies

• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements

3-96

This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters will appear on the display instead of
the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the time of
day, a program type (PTY) for current programming, and
the name of the program being broadcast.

XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in
the 48 contiguous United States and in Canada
(if available). XM™ offers over 100 coast-to-coast
channels including music, news, sports, talk, and
children’s programming. XM™ provides digital quality
audio and text information that includes song title and
artist name. A service fee is required in order to receive
the XM™ service. For more information, contact XM™ at
www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system on
and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.

SCV (Speed-Compensated Volume): With SCV, the
audio system adjusts automatically to make up for
road and wind noise as you drive.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select MIN, MED, or MAX. Each higher setting will
allow for more volume compensation at faster vehicle
speeds. Then, as you drive, SCV automatically
increases the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise
at any speed. The volume level should always sound
the same to you as you drive. To turn SCV off, press this
button until OFF appears on the display.
RCL (Recall): Push this knob to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time. When
the ignition is off, push this knob to display the time.
For RDS, push the RCL knob to change what appears
on the display while using RDS. The display options
are station name, RDS station frequency, PTY, and the
name of the program (if available).
For XM™ (if equipped), push the RCL knob while in
XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories of
information related to the current song or channel:
Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel
Number/Channel Name.
To change the default on the display, push the RCL
knob until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob until the display flashes. The selected display
will now be the default.
3-97

Finding a Station

Setting Preset Stations

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display will
show the selection.

Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programmed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:

TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.

1. Turn the radio on.

w SEEK x:

Press the up or the down arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.

2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2.

The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.

3. Tune in the desired station.

w SCAN x:

5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return and the equalization that
was selected will be stored for that pushbutton.

Press and hold either arrow for
two seconds until SCAN appears on the display and
you hear a beep. The radio will go to a station, play for
a few seconds, then go on to the next station. Press
either arrow again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either SCAN
arrow for more than four seconds until PSCAN and the
preset number appear on the display and you hear
two beeps. The radio will go to the first preset station
stored on the pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then
go on to the next preset station. Press either SCAN
arrow again to stop scanning presets.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.

3-98

4. Press EQ to select the equalization.

6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
TONE: Press and release this button until BASS, MID,
or TREB appears on the display. The SELECT LED
indicator will light to show that the tone control can be
adjusted. Turn the SELECT knob to increase or to
decrease. If a station is weak or noisy, decrease
the treble.
To return all of the tone controls to the middle position,
press and hold the TONE button until FLAT appears
on the display
EQ (Equalizer): Press this button to select customized
equalization settings.
Up to six customized equalization settings, can be
programmed, by performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Use the TONE button and the SELECT knob to
create the equalization.
3. Press and hold the EQ button for two seconds.
SELECT EQ # will appear on the display and the
EQ symbol will flash.
4. Press EQ or turn the SELECT knob to select the
EQ number.

5. Press and hold the EQ button or push the SELECT
knob to store the equalization setting and the
number. EQ SAVED will appear on the display and
you will hear a beep.
6. Repeat the steps for the other EQ settings
and numbers.
EQ 5 has been programmed at the factory for use with
talk radio, but it can be preset to a different tone.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
BAL (Balance): To adjust the balance between the
right and the left speakers, press and release this button
until BAL appears on the display. The SELECT LED
indicator will light to show that the speakers can
be adjusted. Turn the SELECT knob to move the sound
toward the right or the left speakers.
FADE: To adjust the fade between the front and the
rear speakers, press and release this button until FADE
appears on the display. The SELECT LED indicator
will light to show that the speakers can be adjusted. Turn
the SELECT knob to move the sound toward the front
or the rear speakers.
Pressing and holding the BAL FADE button for
two seconds will return all speaker settings to the
middle position.

3-99

Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(RDS and XM™)
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press the PROG TYPE button to activate program
type select mode. PTY will appear on the display.
2. Turn the SELECT knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press either
SEEK arrow to select the PTY and take you to
the PTY’s first station.
4. To go to another station within that PTY, while the
PTY is displayed, press either SEEK arrow once. If
the PTY is not displayed, press either SEEK
arrow twice to display the PTY and then to go to
another station.
5. Press PROG TYPE to exit program type
select mode.
If PTY times out and is no longer on the display, go
back to Step 1.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will search for
stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.

SCAN: Scan the stations within a PTY by performing
the following:
1. Press PROG TYPE to activate program type select
mode. PTY will appear on the display.
2. Turn the SELECT knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and hold
either SCAN arrow, and the radio will begin
scanning the stations in the PTY.
4. Press either SCAN arrow to stop at a station.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will scan for
stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. To turn alternate frequency on,
press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will
appear on the display. The radio may switch to stations
with a stronger frequency.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite
Radio Service.

3-100

Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)

RDS Messages

These pushbuttons have factory PTY presets. Up to
12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2), can be programmed on
the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:

ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is low or
a CD is playing. If a CD is playing, play will stop during
the announcement. Alert announcements cannot be
turned off.

1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
2. Press PROG TYPE to activate program type select
mode. PTY will appear on the display.
3. Turn the SELECT knob to select a PTY.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the PTY that
was set will return, if program type select mode is
activated.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this
button to see the message. The message may display
the artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the INFO
button. A new group of words will appear on the display
after every press of the button. Once the complete
message has been displayed, INFO will disappear from
the display until another new message is received.
The last message can be displayed by pressing
the INFO button. You can view the last message
until a new message is received or a different station
is tuned to.

3-101

TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display, the
tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.
To receive the traffic announcement from the tuned
station, press this button. Brackets will be displayed
around TRAF and when a traffic announcement comes
on the tuned radio station you will hear it.
If the station does not broadcast traffic announcements,
press the TRAF button and the radio will seek to a
station that does. When a station that broadcasts traffic
announcements is found, the radio will stop seeking
and brackets will be displayed around TRAF. If no
station is found that broadcasts traffic announcements,
NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display.
If the brackets are on the display and TRAF is not,
press the TRAF button to remove the brackets or use
the TUNE knob or the SEEK arrows to go to a
station that supports traffic announcements.
The radio will play the traffic announcement if the
volume is low. The radio will interrupt the play of a CD if
the last tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements
and the brackets are displayed.
This function does not apply to XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.

3-102

Radio Messages
CALIBRATE: The audio system has been calibrated for
your vehicle from the factory. If CALIBRATE appears
on the display it means that the radio has not been
configured properly for your vehicle and must be
returned your GM dealer for service.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take the vehicle
to your GM dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer.

XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message

Condition

Action Required

XL (Explicit
Language Channels)

XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.

These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

Updating

Updating
encryption code

The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.

No Signal

Loss of signal

The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When the vehicle
moves into an open area, the signal should return.

Loading XM

Acquiring channel
audio (after a
four second delay)

The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.

CH Off Air

Channel not in service

This channel is not currently in service. Tune to
another channel.

CH Unavail

Channel no
longer available

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.

No Info

Artist Name/Feature
not available

No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.

3-103

XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message

Condition

Action Required

No Info

Song/Program Title
not available

No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.

No Info

Category Name
not available

No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.

No Info

No Text/Informational
message available

No text or informational messages are available at this time
on this channel. The system is working properly.

Not Found

No channel available for
the chosen category

There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.

XM Locked

Theft lock active

The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously been
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message is
received after having your vehicle serviced, check with the
servicing facility.

Radio ID

Radio ID label
(channel 0)

If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed
to activate the service.

Unknown

Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)

If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
may be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer.

Chk XMRcvr

Hardware failure

If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your GM dealer.

3-104

Playing a CD

If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.

Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing. If
you want to insert a CD when the ignition is off, first
press the eject button or push the RCL knob. If
you insert a CD with the radio off and the ignition on, it
will start to play.

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.

The CD symbol will appear on the display when a CD is
loaded. The track number will appear on the display,
as each new track starts to play.
If the ignition or the radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition or
the radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced due
to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality of
the music that has been recorded, and the way the CD-R
has been handled. There may be an increase in skipping,
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading and
ejecting. If these problems occur, check the bottom
surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is damaged,
such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD will not
play properly. If the surface of the CD is soiled, see Care
of Your CDs on page 3-141 for more information.

Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.

\ 1 (Forward):

Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release this pushbutton to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear
on the display.
RDM 3 (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order.
RDM and the track number will appear on the display.
Press RDM again to turn off random play.

3-105

4 s (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release this pushbutton to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear
on the display.
EQ (Equalizer): Press EQ to select the desired
customized equalization setting while playing a CD. The
equalization will be automatically set whenever you
play a CD. See “EQ” listed previously for more
information.

w SEEK x:

Press the down arrow to go to the start
of the current track if more than eight seconds have
played. Press the up arrow to go to the next track.
If either arrow is held or pressed more than once, the
player will continue moving backward or forward through
the CD.

w SCAN x: Press and hold either arrow for more
than two seconds until SCAN and the track number
appear on the display and you hear a beep. The CD will
go to the next track, play for a few seconds, then go
on to the next track. Press either arrow again to
stop scanning.

3-106

RCL (Recall): Push this knob to see how long the
current track has been playing. To change the default
on the display, track and elapsed time, push the
knob until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob until the display flashes. The selected display
will now be the default. While elapsed time is showing,
CD TIME will appear on the display.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio. The CD symbol will appear
on the display when a CD is loaded.

Z (Eject):

Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs
may be loaded with the ignition and radio off, if
this button is pressed first.

CD Messages

Radio with CD (MP3)

CHECK CD: If this message appears on the display
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.

• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.

• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your dealer when reporting the problem.

Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:

• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming

• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies

• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements

3-107

This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or the call letters will appear on the display instead
of the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.

XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and in Canada (if available).
XM™ offers over 100 coast-to-coast channels including
music, news, sports, talk, and children’s programming.
XM™ provides digital quality audio and text information
that includes song title and artist name. A service fee is
required in order to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system on
and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
3-108

RCL (Recall): Push this knob to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time.
When the ignition is turned off, push this knob to
display the time.
For XM™ (if equipped), push the RCL knob while in
XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories of
information related to the current song or channel:
Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel
Number/Channel Name.
To change the default on the display, push the RCL
knob until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob until the display flashes. The selected display
will now be the default.
SCV (Speed-Compensated Volume): With SCV, the
audio system adjusts automatically to make up for
road and wind noise as you drive.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select MIN, MED, or MAX. Each higher setting allows
for more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
Then, as you drive, SCV automatically increases the
volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any speed.
The volume level should always sound the same to
you as you drive. To turn SCV off, press this button until
OFF appears on the display.

Finding a Station

Setting Preset Stations

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display will
show the selection.

Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programmed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:

TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.

1. Turn the radio on.

w SEEK x:

Press the up or the down arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.

2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2.

The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.

3. Tune in the desired station.

w SCAN x:

5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return and the equalization that
was selected will be stored for that pushbutton.

Press and hold either SCAN arrow for
two seconds until SCAN appears on the display and you
hear a beep. The radio will go to a station, play for a
few seconds, then go on to the next station. Press either
SCAN arrow again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either SCAN
arrow for more than four seconds until PSCAN and the
preset number appear on the display and you will
hear a double beep. The radio will go to the first preset
station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next preset station. Press either SCAN arrow again to
stop scanning presets.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.

4. Press EQ to select the equalization.

6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
TONE: Press and release this button until BASS,
MID, or TREB appears on the display. The SELECT
LED indicator will light to show that the tone control can
be adjusted. Turn the SELECT knob to increase or to
decrease. If a station is weak or noisy, decrease
the treble.
3-109

Pressing and holding the TONE button until FLAT
appears on the display will return all of the tone controls
to the middle position.
EQ (Equalizer): Press this button to select customized
bass, midrange, and treble equalization settings.
Up to six customized equalization settings, can be
programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons,
by performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Use the TONE button and the SELECT knob to
create the desired equalization.
3. Press and hold the EQ button for two seconds.
SELECT EQ # will appear on the display and the
EQ symbol will flash.
4. Press EQ or turn the SELECT knob to select the
desired EQ number.
5. Press and hold the EQ button or push the SELECT
knob to store the equalization setting and the
number. You will hear a beep and EQ SAVED will
appear on the display.
6. Repeat the steps for the other EQ settings and
numbers.
EQ 5 has been programmed at the factory for use with
talk radio, but it can be set to a different tone.

3-110

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
BAL (Balance): To adjust the balance between the
right and the left speakers, press and release this button
until BAL appears on the display. The SELECT LED
indicator will light to show that the speakers can
be adjusted. Turn the SELECT knob to move the sound
toward the right or the left speakers.
FADE: To adjust the fade between the front and the
rear speakers, press and release this button until FADE
appears on the display. The SELECT LED indicator
will light to show that the speakers can be adjusted. Turn
the SELECT knob to move the sound toward the front
or the rear speakers.
Pressing and holding the BAL FADE button for
two seconds will return all speaker settings to the
middle position.

Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(RDS and XM™)
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press PROG TYPE to activate program type
select mode. The PTY symbol will appear on
the display.
2. Turn the SELECT knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press either
SEEK arrow to select the PTY and to take you to
the PTY’s first station.
4. To go to another station within that PTY, and the
PTY is displayed, press either SEEK arrow once.
If the PTY is not displayed, press either SEEK
arrow twice to display the PTY and then to go to
another station.
5. Press PROG TYPE to exit program type
select mode.
If PTY times out and is no longer on the display, go
back to Step 1.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will search for
stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.

w SCAN x: Scan the stations within a PTY by
performing the following:
1. Press PROG TYPE to activate program type select
mode. The PTY symbol will appear on the display.
2. Turn the SELECT knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and hold
either SCAN arrow, and the radio will begin
scanning the stations in the PTY.
4. Press either SCAN arrow to stop at a station.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will scan for
stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. To turn alternate frequency on,
press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will
appear on the display. The radio may switch to stations
with a stronger frequency.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite
Radio Service.

3-111

Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)

RDS Messages

These pushbuttons have factory PTY presets. Up to
12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2), can be programmed on
the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:

ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is low or
a CD is playing. If a CD is playing, play will stop during
the announcement. Alert announcements cannot be
turned off.

1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
2. Press PROG TYPE to activate program type select
mode. The PTY symbol will appear on the display.
3. Turn the SELECT knob to select a PTY.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the PTY that
was set will return, if program type select mode is
activated.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

3-112

ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this
button to see the message. The message may display
the artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.

If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the INFO
button. A new group of words will appear on the display
after every press of this button. Once the complete
message has been displayed, the information symbol
will disappear from the display until another new
message is received. The last message can be
displayed by pressing the INFO button. You can view
the last message until a new message is received
or a different station is tuned to.
TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display, the
tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.
To receive the traffic announcement from the tuned
station, press this button. Brackets will be displayed
around TRAF and when a traffic announcement comes
on the tuned radio station you will hear it.
If the station does not broadcast traffic announcements,
press the TRAF button and the radio will seek to a
station that does. When a station that broadcasts traffic
announcements is found, the radio will stop seeking
and brackets will be displayed around TRAF. If no
station is found that broadcasts traffic announcements,
NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display.

If the brackets are on the display and TRAF is not,
press the TRAF button to remove the brackets or use
the TUNE knob or the SEEK arrows to go to a
station that supports traffic announcements. If no station
is found that broadcasts traffic announcements, NO
TRAFFIC will appear on the display.
The radio will play the traffic announcement if the
volume is low. The radio will interrupt the play of a
CD if the last tuned station broadcasts traffic
announcements and the brackets are displayed.
This function does not apply to XM™ Satellite
Radio Service.

Radio Messages
CALIBRATE: The audio system has been calibrated for
your vehicle from the factory. If CALIBRATE appears
on the display it means that the radio has not been
configured properly for your vehicle and it must
be returned to your GM dealer for service.

3-113

XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message

Condition

Action Required

XL (Explicit
Language Channels)

XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.

These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

Updating

Updating
encryption code

The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.

No Signal

Loss of signal

The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM signal. When the vehicle is
moved into an open area, the signal should return.

Loading XM

Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)

The radio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.

CH Off Air

Channel not in service

This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.

CH Unavail

Channel no
longer available

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.

No Info

Artist Name/Feature
not available

No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.

3-114

XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message

Condition

Action Required

No Info

Song/Program Title
not available

No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.

No Info

Category Name not
available

No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.

No Info

No Text/Informational
message available

No text or informational messages are available at this time
on this channel. The system is working properly.

Not Found

No channel available for
the chosen category

There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.

XM Locked

Theft lock active

The XM receiver in your vehicle may have previously been
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message is
received after having your vehicle serviced, check with your
GM dealer.

Radio ID

Radio ID label
(channel 0)

If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This label is needed to
activate the service.

Unknown

Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)

If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
may be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer.

Chk XMRcvr

Hardware failure

If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your GM dealer.

3-115

Playing a CD

If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.

Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and READING DISC and the
CD symbol will appear on the display. If you want to
insert a CD with the ignition off, first press the EJECT
button or push the RCL knob.

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player it will stay in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD will start to play where it stopped,
if it was the last selected audio source.
When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
the display. As each new track starts to play, the
track number will appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the
CD will not play properly. If the surface of the CD
is soiled, see Care of Your CDs on page 3-141 for
more information.
3-116

Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.

\ 1 (Forward):

Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release this pushbutton to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear
on the display.
RDM 2 (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order.
RDM and the track number will appear on the display.
Press RDM again to turn off random play.

3 # (Next Folder): This button does not have a
function for non-MP3 CDs.
4 s (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release this pushbutton to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear
on the display.
6 ! (Previous Folder): This button does not have a
function for non-MP3 CDs.
EQ (Equalizer): Press EQ to select the desired
customized equalization setting while playing a CD. The
equalization will be automatically set whenever a CD is
played. See “EQ” listed previously for more information.

w SEEK x: Press the up arrow to go to the start of
the next track. Press the down arrow to go to the start of
the previous track. Pressing either arrow for more
than two seconds will search the previous or next tracks
at two tracks per second. When the track number that
you would like to play appears on the display,
release the arrow to stop searching and to play
the track.

w SCAN x: Press and hold either arrow for more
than two seconds until SCAN and the track number
appear on the display and you hear a beep. The CD will
go to the next track, play for a few seconds, then go
on to the next track. Press either arrow again to
stop scanning.
RCL (Recall): Push this knob to see how long the
current track has been playing. To change the default
on the display, track and elapsed time, push the
knob until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob until the display flashes. The selected display
will now be the default. While elapsed time appears on
the display, CD TIME will appear on the display.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio. The CD symbol will appear
on the display when a CD is loaded.
EJECT: Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may be
activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs
may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this
button is pressed first.

3-117

Using an MP3 CD
MP3 Format
If you burn your own MP3 disc on a personal computer:

• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a
CD-R disc.

• Make sure to finalize the disc when burning an MP3
disc, using multiple sessions. It is usually better to
burn the disc all at once.

• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed or
variable bit rates. Song title, artist name, and album
will be available for display by the radio when
recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.

• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on
one disc.

• Make sure playlists have a.pls, or.m3u, or.rmp
extension, other file extensions may not work.
The player will be able to read and play a maximum of
50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files.
Long file names, folder names, or playlist names may
use more disc memory space than necessary. To
conserve space on the disc, minimize the length of the
file, folder or playlist names. You can also play an
MP3 CD that was recorded using no file folders.

3-118

The system can support up to 11 folders in depth,
though, keep the depth of the folders to a minimum in
order to keep down the complexity and confusion
in trying to locate a particular folder during playback. If a
CD contains more than the maximum of 50 folders,
50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files the player will let
you access and navigate up to the maximum, but all
items over the maximum will be ignored.

Root Directory
The root directory will be treated as a folder. If the root
directory has compressed audio files, the directory
will be displayed as F1 ROOT. All files contained directly
under the root directory will be accessed prior to any
root directory folders. However, playlists (Px) will always
be accessed before root folders or files.

Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
compressed files directly beneath them, the player will
advance to the next folder in the file structure that
contains compressed audio files and the empty folder
will not be displayed or numbered.

No Folder
When the CD contains only compressed files, the
files will be located under the root folder. The next
and previous folder functions will have no function
on a CD that was recorded without folders or playlists.
When displaying the name of the folder the radio
will display ROOT.
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files will be located under
the root folder. The folder down and the folder up
buttons will search playlists (Px) first and then go to the
root folder. When the radio displays the name of the
folder the radio will display ROOT.

Order of Play
Tracks will be played in the following order:
• Play will begin from the first track in the first playlist
and will continue sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has been played, play will continue from the first
track of the first playlist.
• If the CD does not contain any playlists, then play
will begin from the first track under the root directory.
When all tracks from the root directory have been
played, play will continue from files according to their
numerical listing. After playing the last track from the
last folder, play will begin again at the first track of
the first folder or root directory.

When play enters a new folder, the display will not
automatically show the new folder name unless
you have chosen the folder mode as the default display.
See RCL later in this section for more information.
The new track name will appear on the display.

File System and Naming
The song name that will be displayed will be the song
name that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name
is not present in the ID3 tag, then the radio will
display the file name without the extension (such as
.mp3) as the track name.
Track names longer than 32 characters or 4 pages will
be shortened. The display will not show parts of
words on the last page of text and the extension of the
filename will not be displayed.

Preprogrammed Playlists
You can access preprogrammed playlists which were
created by WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real
Jukebox™ software, however, you will not have editing
capability. These playlists will be treated as special
folders containing compressed audio song files.

3-119

Playing an MP3

If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.

Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in, and READING will appear on
the display. The CD should begin playing and the CD
symbol will appear on the display. If you want to insert a
CD with the ignition off, first press the EJECT button
or the RCL knob.

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player it will stay in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD will start to play where it stopped,
if it was the last selected audio source.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the
CD will not play properly. If the surface of the CD
is soiled, see Care of Your CDs on page 3-141 for
more information.
3-120

Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.

\ 1 (Forward):

Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance
at 10 times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it
for more than two seconds to advance at 20 times
the normal playing speed. Release this pushbutton to
play the track. FWD and the elapsed time of the
track will appear on the display.

RDM 2 (Random): To repeat the tracks in the current
folder or playlist, press and release this pushbutton.
FOLDER RANDOM will appear on the display. Once all
of the tracks in the current folder or playlist have
been played, the system will move on to the next folder
or playlist and play all of the tracks in random order.
To repeat the tracks on the CD, press and hold
this pushbutton for two seconds. You will hear a beep
and DISC RANDOM will appear on the display. This
feature will not work with playlists.
When in random, pressing and releasing either SEEK
arrow will take you to the next or previous random track.
Press and release this pushbutton again to turn off
random play. NO RANDOM will appear on the display.
3 # (Next Folder): Press this pushbutton to go
to the first track in the next folder or playlist. If the disc
contains playlists, it will go through the playlist, then
the folders. Pressing this button while in folder random
mode will take you to the next folder and random
the tracks in that folder. This function will not work on a
CD that does not contain folders or playlists.

4 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at
10 times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for
more than two seconds to reverse at 20 times the
normal playing speed. Release this pushbutton to play
the track. REV and the elapsed time of the track
will appear on the display. If this pushbutton is pressed
for more than 20 seconds, the radio will stop reversing
and begin to play.
6 ! (Previous Folder): Press this pushbutton to go
to the first track in the previous folder or playlist. If
the disc contains playlists, it will go through the playlist,
then the folders. Pressing this pushbutton while in
folder random mode will take you to the previous folder
and random the tracks in that folder. This function
will not work on a CD that does not contain folders
or playlists.

w SEEK x: Press the up arrow to go to the start of
the next track. Press the down arrow to go to the
start of the previous track. Pressing either arrow for
more than two seconds will search the previous or next
tracks at two tracks per second. When the track
number that you would like to play appears on the
display, release the arrow to stop searching and to
play the track.

3-121

TUNE: Turn this knob to fast track reverse or advance
through tracks in all folders or playlists. The track
number and file name will appear on the display for
each track. Turn this knob while in random to fast track
reverse or advance the tracks in sequential order.
RCL (Recall): Push this knob to switch between track
mode, folder/playlist mode, and time of day mode.
The display will show only 13 characters, but there can
be up to three pages of text. If there are more than
13 characters in the song, folder, or playlist name
pushing this knob within two seconds will take you to
the next page of text. If there are no other pages to be
shown, pushing this knob within two seconds will
take you to the next display mode.
Track mode will display the current track number and
the ID3 tag song name.
Folder/playlist mode will display the current folder or
playlist number and the folder/playlist name.
Time of day mode will display the time of day and the
ID3 tag song name.

3-122

To change the default on the display, push this knob
until you see the display you want, then hold this knob
for two seconds. The radio will produce one beep
and the selected display will now be the default.
INFO (Information): INFO will appear on the display
whenever a current track has ID3 tag information. Press
this button to display the artist name and album
contained in the tag. INFO will disappear from the
display when the information in the ID3 tag has finished.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio. The CD symbol will appear
on the display when a CD is loaded.
EJECT: Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may be
activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs
may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this
button is pressed first.

CD Messages

Radio with Six-Disc CD

CHECK CD: If this message appears on the display
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.

• The format of the CD may not be compatible. See
“MP3 Format” earlier in this section.

• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.

• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.

If your vehicle has the Monsoon audio system, included
are nine speakers and an eight channel amplifier.
The radio will display MONSOON when the radio or the
ignition is turned on. See your GM dealer for details.

Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.

3-123

With RDS, the radio can do the following:

• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming

• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies

• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters will appear on the display instead of
the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.

3-124

XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and in Canada (if available).
XM™ offers over 100 coast-to-coast channels including
music, news, sports, talk, and children’s programming.
XM™ provides digital quality audio and text information
that includes song title and artist name. A service fee is
required in order to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system on
and off.
VOLUME: Turn this knob to increase or to decrease
the volume.
RCL (Recall): Press this knob to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time. When
the ignition is off, press this knob to display the time.

For RDS, press the RCL knob to change what appears
on the display while using RDS. The display options
are station name, RDS station frequency, PTY, and the
name of the program (if available).
For XM™ (if equipped), press the RCL knob while in
XM mode to retrieve four different categories of
information related to the current song or channel:
Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel
Number/Channel Name.
To change the default on the display, press the RCL
knob until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob until the display flashes. The selected display
will now be the default.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, the audio system adjusts automatically to make
up for road and wind noise as you drive.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select MIN, MED, or MAX. Each higher setting will
allow for more volume compensation at faster vehicle
speeds. Then, as you drive, automatic volume increases
the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any
speed. The volume level should always sound the same
to you as you drive. To turn automatic volume off,
press this button until OFF appears on the display.

Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display will
show the selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.

sSEEK t: Press the right or the left arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.

sSCAN t: Press and hold either SCAN arrow for
two seconds until SC appears on the display and
you hear a beep. The radio will go to a station, play for
a few seconds, then go on to the next station. Press
either SCAN arrow again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either SCAN
arrow for more than four seconds. PRESET SCAN will
appear on the display and you will hear a double
beep. The radio will go to the first preset station stored
on the pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go
on to the next preset station. Press either SCAN arrow
again to stop scanning presets.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.

3-125

Setting Preset Stations
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programmed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return and the equalization that
was selected will be stored for that pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
AUDIO: Push the AUDIO knob until BASS, MID, or
TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob to increase
or to decrease. If a station is weak or noisy, decrease
the treble.
To adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle
position, select BASS, MID, or TREB and push and hold
the AUDIO knob. The display level will be adjusted to
the middle position and you will hear a beep.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. CENTERED will
appear on the display and you will hear one beep.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to select customized equalization settings designed
for country, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.
To return to the manual mode, press the AUTO EQ
button until CUSTOM appears on the display. Then
manually adjust the bass, midrange, and treble using the
AUDIO knob.

3-126

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, push the AUDIO knob until BAL
appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the
sound toward the right or the left speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and rear speakers,
push and hold the AUDIO knob until FAD appears on
the display. Turn the knob to move the sound toward the
front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance and the fade to the middle
position, select balance or fade and push and hold the
AUDIO knob. The display level will be adjusted to
the middle position and you will hear a beep.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker controls are displayed. CENTERED will
appear on the display and you will hear one beep.

Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(RDS and XM™)
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program
type select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected
PTY will appear on the display.
2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press either
SEEK arrow to select and to take you to the
PTY’s first station.
4. To go to another station within that PTY, and the
PTY is displayed, press either SEEK arrow once.
If the PTY is not displayed, press either SEEK
arrow twice to display the PTY and then to go to
another station.
5. Press P-TYPE to exit program type select mode.
If PTY times out and is no longer on the display,
go back to Step 1.
If both P-TYPE and TRAF are on, the radio will search
for stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.

3-127

To use the PTY interrupt feature, press and hold the
P-TYPE button until you hear a beep on the PTY you
want to interrupt with. When selected, an asterisk will
appear beside that PTY on the display. You may select
multiple interrupts, if desired. When you are listening to a
CD, the last selected RDS station will interrupt play, if that
selected program type format is broadcast.
SCAN: Scan the stations within a PTY by performing
the following:

If both P-TYPE and TRAF are on, the radio will scan for
stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. To turn alternate frequency on,
press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will
appear on the display. The radio may switch to stations
with a stronger frequency.

1. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY will
appear on the display.

To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.

2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.

This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite
Radio Service.

3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and hold
either SCAN arrow, and the radio will begin
scanning the stations in the PTY.
4. Press either SCAN arrow to stop at a station.

3-128

Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)

RDS Messages

These buttons have factory PTY presets. Up to
12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2), can be programmed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:

ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is low or
a CD is playing. If a CD is playing, play will stop during
the announcement. Alert announcements cannot be
turned off.

1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
2. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY will
appear on the display.
3. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the PTY that
was set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this
button to see the message. The message may display
the artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.

3-129

If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the INFO
button. A new group of words will appear on the display
after every press of this button. Once the complete
message has been displayed, INFO will disappear from
the display until another new message is received.
The last message can be displayed by pressing
the INFO button. You can view the last message until a
new message is received or a different station is
tuned to.
TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display, the
tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.
To receive the traffic announcement from the tuned
station, press this button. Brackets will be displayed
around TRAF and when a traffic announcement comes
on the tuned radio station you will hear it.
If the current tuned station does not broadcast traffic
announcements, press the TRAF button and the
radio will seek to a station that does. When a station
that broadcasts traffic announcements is found, the radio
will stop seeking and brackets will be displayed
around TRAF. If no station is found, NO TRAFFIC will
appear on the display.

If the brackets are on the display and TRAF is not,
press the TRAF button to remove the brackets or use
the TUNE knob or the SEEK arrows to go to a
station that supports traffic announcements. If no station
is found that broadcasts traffic announcements, NO
TRAFFIC will appear on the display.
The radio will play the traffic announcement if the
volume is low. The radio will interrupt the play of a CD if
the last tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements
and the brackets are displayed.
This function does not apply to XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.

Radio Messages
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system has
been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If
CAL ERR appears on the display it means that the radio
has not been configured properly for the vehicle and it
must be returned to your GM dealer for service.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take your vehicle
to your GM dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer.

3-130

XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message

Condition

Action Required

XL (Explicit Language
Channels)

XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.

These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

Updating

Updating
encryption code

The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.

No Signal

Loss of signal

The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM signal. When the vehicle is
moved into an open area, the signal should return.

Loading XM

Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)

The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.

CH Off Air

Channel not in service

This channel is not currently in service. Tune to
another channel.

CH Unavail

Channel no
longer available

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.

No Info

Artist Name/Feature
not available

No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.

3-131

XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message

Condition

Action Required

No Info

Song/Program Title
not available

No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.

No Info

Category Name not
available

No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.

No Info

No Text/Informational
message available

No text or informational messages are available at this time
on this channel. The system is working properly.

Not Found

No channel available for
the chosen category

There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.

XM Locked

Theft lock active

The XM receiver in the vehicle may have previously been in
another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receivers cannot
be swapped between vehicles. If this message is received
after having your vehicle serviced, check with your
GM dealer.

Radio ID

Radio ID label
(channel 0)

If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This label is needed to
activate the service.

Unknown

Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)

If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
may be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer.

Chk XMRcvr

Hardware failure

If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your GM dealer.

3-132

Playing a CD
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
the CD. As each new track starts to play, the track
number will appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the
CD will not play properly. If the surface of the CD
is soiled, see Care of Your CDs on page 3-141 for more
information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
LOAD CD Z: Press the LOAD side of this button to
load CDs into the CD player. This CD player will
hold up to six CDs.
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and release the LOAD button.
3. Wait for the light, located to the right of the slot, to
turn green.
4. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull the CD in.

3-133

To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and hold the LOAD button for two seconds.
You will hear a beep and the light, located to the
right of the slot, will begin to flash.
3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green, load
a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot, label side
up. The player will pull the CD in.
4. Once the CD is loaded, the light will begin flashing
again. Press the LOAD button again. Once the light
turns green, load the next disc. Repeat this
procedure for each CD. The CD player takes up to
six CDs. Do not try to load more than six.
To load more than one CD but less than six, complete
Steps 1 through 3. When finished loading CDs, the
radio will begin to play the last CD loaded.
If more than one CD has been loaded, a number for
each CD will be displayed.

3-134

Playing a Specific Loaded CD
For every CD loaded, a number will appear on the
display. To play a specific CD, first press the CD AUX
button, then press the numbered pushbutton that
corresponds to the CD. A small bar will appear under
the CD number that is playing and the track number
will appear.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
LOAD CD Z (Eject): Press the CD eject side of this
button to eject a CD(s). You will hear a beep and the
indicator light will flash to let you know when a CD
is being ejected.
REMOVE CD will appear on the display. The CD can
be removed. If the CD is not removed, after 25 seconds,
the CD will be automatically pulled back into the
player. If the CD is pushed back into the player, before
the 25 second time period is complete, the player
will sense an error and will try to eject the CD several
times before stopping.

Do not repeatedly press the CD eject button to eject a
CD after trying to push it in manually. The player’s
25-second eject timer will reset at each press of eject,
causing the player to not eject the CD until the
25-second time period has elapsed.
Once the player stops and the CD is ejected, remove
the CD. After removing the CD, push the PWR knob off
and then on again, or wait for the system to reset.
This will clear the CD-sensing feature and enable CDs
to be loaded into the player again.

{ REV (Reverse):

Press and hold this button to
reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound
at a reduced volume. Release this button to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear
on the display.

FWD | (Forward): Press and hold this button to
advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound
at a reduced volume. Release this button to play
the passage. The elapsed time of the track will
appear on the display.

RPT (Repeat): With repeat, one track or an entire CD
can be repeated.
To use repeat, do the following:

• To repeat the track you are listening to, press and
release the RPT button. RPT will appear on the
display. Press RPT again to turn off repeat play.

• To repeat the CD you are listening to, press and
hold the RPT button for two seconds. RPT will
appear on the display. Press RPT again to turn off
repeat play.
RDM (Random): With random, you can listen to the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order, on one
CD or on all of the CDs.
To use random, do one of the following:

• To play the tracks on the CD you are listening to in
random order, press and release the RDM button.
RANDOM ONE will appear on the display. Press
RDM again to turn off random play.

• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are loaded,
in random order, press and hold RDM for more
than two seconds. You will hear a beep and
RANDOM ALL will appear on the display. Press
RDM again to turn off random play.

3-135

AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press AUTO EQ
to select the desired equalization setting while playing
a CD. The equalization will be set whenever a CD
is played. For more information on AUTO EQ,
see “AUTO EQ” listed previously in this section.

sSEEK t:

Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track, if more than ten seconds have played.
Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If either
arrow is held or pressed more than once, the player will
continue moving backward or forward through the CD.

sSCAN t:

To scan one CD, press and hold either
SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use this
feature to listen to 10 seconds of each track of the
currently selected CD. Press either SCAN arrow again,
to stop scanning.

3-136

To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold either SCAN
arrow for more than four seconds until CD SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use this
feature to listen to 10 seconds of the first track of
each loaded CD. Press either SCAN arrow again, to
stop scanning.
RCL (Recall): Press this knob to see how long the
current track has been playing. To change the default
on the display, track and elapsed time, press the
knob until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob until the display flashes. The selected display
will now be the default.
BAND: Press this button to play the radio when a CD
is playing. The inactive CD(s) will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio.

Using Song List Mode
The six-disc CD changer has a feature called song list.
This feature is capable of saving 20 track selections.
To save tracks into the song list feature, perform
the following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at least
one CD. See “LOAD CD” listed previously in this
section for more information.

To play the song list, press the SONG LIST button.
One beep will be heard and S-LIST will appear on the
display. The recorded tracks will begin to play in
the order they were saved.
Seek through the song list by using the SEEK SCAN
arrows. Seeking past the last saved track will return the
song list to the first saved track.
To delete tracks from the song list, perform the
following steps:

2. Check to see that the CD changer is not in song list
mode. S-LIST should not appear in the display. If
S-LIST is present, press the SONG LIST button
to turn it off.

1. Turn the CD player on.

3. Select the desired CD by pressing the numbered
pushbutton and then use the SEEK SCAN right
arrow to locate the track to be saved. The track will
begin to play.

3. Press the SEEK SCAN arrows to select the desired
track to be deleted.

4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button to save
the track into memory. When SONG LIST is
pressed, one beep will be heard immediately. After
two seconds of continuously pressing the SONG
LIST button, two beeps will be heard to confirm that
the track has been saved.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections.
S-LIST FULL will appear on the display if you try to save
more than 20 selections.

2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.
S-LIST will appear on the display.

4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for
two seconds. When SONG LIST is pressed,
one beep will be heard immediately. After
two seconds of continuously pressing the SONG
LIST button, two beeps will be heard to confirm that
the track has been deleted.
After a track has been deleted, the remaining tracks are
moved up the list. When another track is added to
the song list, the track will be added to the end of
the list.

3-137

To delete the entire song list, perform the
following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.
S-LIST will appear on the display.
3. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for more
than four seconds. One beep will be heard,
followed by two beeps after two seconds, and a
final beep will be heard after four seconds. S-LIST
EMPTY will appear on the display indicating the
song list has been deleted.
If a CD is ejected, and the song list contains saved
tracks from that CD, those tracks are automatically
deleted from the song list. Any tracks saved to the song
list again are added to the bottom of the list.
To end song list mode, press the SONG LIST button.
One beep will be heard and S-LIST will be removed from
the display.

CD Messages
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the display
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.

• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.

• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.

3-138

Navigation/Radio System

Audio Steering Wheel Controls

Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system.
The navigation system has built-in features intended to
minimize driver distraction. Technology alone, no
matter how advanced, can never replace your own
judgment. See the navigation system manual for some
tips to help you reduce distractions while driving.

Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of
your vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically
by learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). If the radio is moved to a different
vehicle, it will not operate and LOCKED will appear
on the display.

If your vehicle has this feature, some audio controls
can be adjusted at the steering wheel. They include
the following:

When the radio and vehicle are turned off, the blinking
red light indicates that THEFTLOCK® is armed.

wt u x (Seek): Press the up or the down arrow
to go to the next or previous station and stay there.

With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will not
operate if stolen.

To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for
two seconds until FREQUENCY SCAN appears on the
display. The radio will go to a station, play for a few
seconds, then go to the next station. Press either arrow
again to stop scanning.
The sound will mute while seeking or scanning. The
radio will only seek or scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
3-139

When a CD is playing, press either arrow to go to the
previous or next track, if more than eight seconds have
played. If either arrow is held or pressed more than
once, the player will continue moving backward
or forward through the CD.
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped).
1 - 6: Press this button to scan the stations that are
programmed on the radio preset pushbuttons. The radio
will go to the next preset station stored on the
pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next preset station. Press this button again to stop
scanning. The radio will only scan preset stations with a
strong signal that are in the selected band.

$ (Mute/OnStar®):

Press and release this button to
silence the audio system. Press it again, or any
other radio button to turn the sound on.
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar, press and hold
this button to interact with the OnStar system. See
the OnStar® System on page 2-38 in this manual for
more information.

r (Play): When listening to the radio, press this
button to play a cassette tape or CD.
wu x (Volume): Press the up or down arrow to
increase or decrease the volume.
3-140

Radio Reception
You may experience frequency interference and static
during normal radio reception if items such as cellphone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and
external electronic devices are plugged into the
accessory power outlet. If there is interference or static,
unplug the item from the accessory power outlet.

AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for
FM, especially at night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with each other.
For better radio reception, most AM radio stations will
boost the power levels during the day, and then reduce
these levels during the night. Static can also occur
when things like storms and power lines interfere with
radio reception. When this happens, try reducing
the treble on your radio.

FM Stereo
FM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signals will
reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing
the sound to fade in and out.

XM™ Satellite Radio Service

Care of the CD Player

XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada (if available). Just as with
FM, tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite
radio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out. In
addition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage,
bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause loss of the
XM™ signal for a period of time. The radio may display
NO SIGNAL to indicate interference.

The use of CD lens cleaners for CD players is not
advised, due to the risk of contaminating the internal
lens of the CD optics with lubricants.

Care of Your CDs
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct
sunlight and dust. The CD player scans the bottom
surface of the disc. If the surface of a CD is damaged,
such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD will
not play properly or not at all. If the surface of a CD is
soiled, take a soft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft
cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution mixed with
water, and clean it. Make sure the wiping process starts
from the center to the edge.
Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while handling it;
this could damage the surface. Pick up CDs by
grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and
the outer edge.

Backglass Antenna
The AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rear window
defogger, located in the rear window. Be sure that the
inside surface of the rear window is not scratched and
that the lines on the glass are not damaged. If the inside
surface is damaged, it could interfere with radio
reception. Also, for proper radio reception, the antenna
connector at the top-center of the rear window needs to
be properly attached to the post on the glass.
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear
the inside rear window may damage the rear window
antenna and/or the rear window defogger. Repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Do not clear
the inside rear window with sharp objects.
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting with
metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or distort the incoming
radio reception. Any damage caused to your
backglass antenna due to metallic tinting materials
will not be covered by your warranty.

3-141

Because this antenna is built into your rear window,
there is a reduced risk of damage caused by car washes
and vandals.
If you choose to add a cellular telephone to your
vehicle, and the antenna needs to be attached to the
glass, be sure that you do not damage the grid lines for
the AM-FM antenna. There is enough space between
the lines to attach a cellular telephone antenna
without interfering with radio reception.
Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting to the back glass.
The metallic film in some tinting materials will interfere
with or distort the incoming radio reception. Care
must be taken when cleaning the rear window because
it breaks in the resistive material heating element
and will adversely affect radio and defogger
performance. See your dealer for details.

XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof
of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and
ice build up for clear radio reception.

3-142

If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the
XM™ system may be affected if the sunroof is open.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere
with the performance of the XM™ system. Make sure
the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is not obstructed.

Chime Level Adjustment
The radio is used to adjust the vehicle’s chime level.
To change the volume level of the chime, press and hold
pushbutton 6 with the ignition on and the radio power
off. The volume level will change from the normal
level to loud, and LOUD will appear on the radio display.
To change back to the default or normal setting,
press and hold pushbutton 6 again. The volume level
will change from the loud level to normal, and NORMAL
will appear on the radio display. Each time the chime
volume is changed, three chimes will sound as an
example of the new volume selected. Removing the
radio and not replacing it with a factory radio or chime
module will disable vehicle chimes.

Section 4

Driving Your Vehicle

Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2
Drunken Driving .............................................4-3
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-5
Braking .........................................................4-6
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .........................4-7
Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-8
Traction Control System (TCS) .........................4-9
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) ....................4-11
StabiliTrak® Plus System ...............................4-12
Steering ......................................................4-13
Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-16
Passing .......................................................4-16
Loss of Control .............................................4-18
Driving at Night ............................................4-19

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-20
City Driving ..................................................4-22
Freeway Driving ...........................................4-23
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-24
Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-25
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-26
Winter Driving ..............................................4-28
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow ..............................................4-32
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-33
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-33
Towing ..........................................................4-38
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-38
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-38
Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-40

4-1

Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 1-10.

4-2

{CAUTION:
Defensive driving really means “Be ready for
anything.” On city streets, rural roads, or
expressways, it means “Always expect the
unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians or other
drivers are going to be careless and make
mistakes. Anticipate what they might do and
be ready. Rear-end collisions are about the
most preventable of accidents. Yet they are
common. Allow enough following distance.
Defensive driving requires that a driver
concentrate on the driving task. Anything that
distracts from the driving task makes proper
defensive driving more difficult and can even
cause a collision, with resulting injury. Ask a
passenger to help do these things, or pull off
the road in a safe place to do them. These
simple defensive driving techniques could
save your life.

Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor
to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive
a vehicle:

•
•
•
•

Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness

Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000 people injured.

Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological, and
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive. But what if people do? How much is “too
much” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot less
than many might think. Although it depends on each
person and situation, here is some general information
on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:

• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking

• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol

4-3

According to the American Medical Association, a 180 lb
(82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml)
bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC
of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.

BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who
consumes food just before or during drinking will have a
somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a man of her same body weight will when
each has the same number of drinks.
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout Canada,
sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In some other
countries, the limit is even lower. For example, it is
0.05 percent in both France and Germany. The
BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States
is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen, it
depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and
how quickly the person drinks them.
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills of
many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.

It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s

4-4

Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of
this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a level
of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in
one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the
right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to
react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There is something else about drinking and driving that
many people do not know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.

{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Please do not drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a
cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.

Control of a Vehicle
You have three systems that make your vehicle go
where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the
steering, and the accelerator. All three systems have to
do their work at the places where the tires meet the road.

4-5

Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, it
is easy to ask more of those control systems than
the tires and road can provide. That means you can lose
control of your vehicle. See Traction Control System
(TCS) on page 4-9 and Enhanced Traction System
(ETS) on page 4-11.

And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement
or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is
wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of your brakes;
the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake
force applied.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a
mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool between
hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much faster if you
do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the traffic
and allow realistic following distances, you will eliminate a
lot of unnecessary braking. That means better braking
and longer brake life.

Braking
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-42.
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
4-6

If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake
normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle may have anti-lock brakes. ABS is an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
If your vehicle has anti-lock
brakes, this warning light
on the instrument panel will
come on briefly when
you start your vehicle.

When you start your engine, or when you begin to
drive away, your anti-lock brake system will
check itself. You may hear a momentary motor or
clicking noise while this test is going on, and you may
even notice that your brake pedal moves or
pulses a little. This is normal.

Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each wheel.

4-7

The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.

Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to
the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have anti-lock brakes.

Using Anti-Lock
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel
a slight brake pedal pulsation or notice some noise,
but this is normal.

Braking in Emergencies
At some time, nearly every driver gets into a situation
that requires hard braking.

As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.

4-8

If you have anti-lock brakes, you can steer and brake at
the same time. However, if you do not have anti-lock
brakes, your first reaction — to hit the brake pedal hard
and hold it down — may be the wrong thing to do.
Your wheels can stop rolling. Once they do, the vehicle
cannot respond to your steering. Momentum will
carry it in whatever direction it was headed when the
wheels stopped rolling. That could be off the road, into
the very thing you were trying to avoid, or into traffic.

If you do not have anti-lock brakes, use a “squeeze”
braking technique. This will give you maximum braking
while maintaining steering control. You can do this
by pushing on the brake pedal with steadily
increasing pressure.
In an emergency, you will probably want to squeeze the
brakes hard without locking the wheels. If you hear or
feel the wheels sliding, ease off the brake pedal.
This will help you retain steering control. If you do have
anti-lock brakes, it is different. See Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) on page 4-7.

This symbol, along with the
TRACTION CONTROL
ACTIVE message, comes
on the DIC screen when
the system is active.

You may feel or hear the system working, but this
is normal.

In many emergencies, steering can help you more than
even the very best braking.

Traction Control System (TCS)
If the vehicle has the 3800 Supercharged V6 engine
or the 5.3L V8 engine, it has a Traction Control
System (TCS) that limits wheel spin. This is especially
useful in slippery road conditions. The system operates
only if it senses that one or both of the front wheels are
spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this
happens, the system works the front brakes and
reduces engine power to limit wheel spin.

When the traction control system is not working, one of
these symbols will come on the instrument panel cluster.

4-9

This symbol, along with
the message TRACTION
CONTROL OFF will
display in the DIC for
three seconds when
the traction control
system is disabled.
If there is a problem with the system, the service
traction system will also appear on the DIC. When these
symbols and messages appear on the instrument
panel and the DIC, the system will not limit wheel spin.
Adjust driving accordingly.
The traction control system automatically comes on
whenever the vehicle is started. To limit wheel
spin, especially in slippery road conditions, always leave
the system on. But the traction control system can be
turned off if needed. The system should be turned off if
the vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud, or snow
and rocking the vehicle is required. See Rocking Your
Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-33 and If Your Vehicle is
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on page 4-32 for
more information.

4-10

Press the traction control
button located on the
console to turn the
system off.

If the system is limiting wheel spin when the traction
control button is pressed, the system will turn off
instantly. Turn the system back on at any time by
pressing the button again.
If the vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow safe use of it, the cruise control can be
used again. See Cruise Control on page 3-11.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3 for more information.

Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
If the vehicle has the 3800 V6 engine and anti-lock
brakes, it has an Enhanced Traction System (ETS) that
limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery
road conditions. The system operates only if it senses
that one or both of the front wheels are spinning or
beginning to lose traction. When this happens,
the system reduces engine power and may also upshift
the transaxle to limit wheel spin.
This symbol comes on
the Driver Information
Center (DIC) when
the ETS is limiting
wheel spin.

If the vehicle is in cruise control when ETS begins to
limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. When road conditions allow safe use of it,
the cruise control can be used again. See Cruise Control
on page 3-11.

One of these lights will appear on the instrument panel
to indicate that the ETS is not on.
This symbol, along with
the message TRACTION
CONTROL OFF will
display on the DIC for
three seconds when the
ETS is not on.

If there is a problem with the system, the service
traction system will also come on in the DIC. See
Enhanced Traction System Warning Light on page 3-45.
When this warning light is on, the system will not limit
wheel spin. Adjust driving accordingly.

ETS operates in all transaxle shift lever positions. But
the system can upshift the transaxle only as high as the
chosen shift lever position, so use the lower gears
only when necessary. See Automatic Transaxle
Operation on page 2-25.
4-11

To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road
conditions, the ETS should always be left on. But the
system can be turned off. The system should be turned
off if the vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud, or
snow and rocking the vehicle is required. See Rocking
Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-33 and If Your
Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on
page 4-32 for more information.
Press the traction control
button located on the
console to turn the
system off.

If the system is limiting wheel spin when the button is
pressed, the system will turn off instantly. Press the
traction control button again to turn the system on.

StabiliTrak® Plus System
The vehicle may have a vehicle stability enhancement
system called StabiliTrak® Plus. It is an advanced
computer controlled system that assists with directional
control of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions.
StabiliTrak® Plus comes on whenever the vehicle is
started. It activates when the computer senses a
discrepancy between the intended path and the direction
the vehicle is actually traveling. StabiliTrak® Plus
selectively applies braking pressure at any one of the
vehicle’s brakes to help control the vehicle in the
steering direction.
This symbol, along with
the STABILITY CONTROL
ACTIVE message comes
on the Driver Information
Center (DIC).

See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-72. You
may also hear a noise or feel vibration in the brake
pedal. This is normal. Continue to steer the vehicle in
the desired direction.

4-12

If there is a problem
detected with StabiliTrak®
Plus, this symbol along
with the SERVICE
STABILITY SYSTEM
warning message
will come on the DIC.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-72. When
this message is displayed, the system is not operational.
Driving should be adjusted accordingly.
To turn the StabiliTrak® system off (GXP only), press
and hold the traction control button for more than
five seconds. A message will appear on the DIC
indicating that StabiliTrak® has been turned off. You can
turn the system back on at any time by pressing the
button again.
If the vehicle is in cruise control when StabiliTrak® Plus
activates, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. When road conditions allow safe use of it,
the cruise control can be used again. See Cruise Control
on page 3-11 for more information.

Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.

Variable Effort Steering
If your vehicle has this steering system, the system
provides less steering effort for parking and when driving
at speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h). Steering effort will
increase at higher speeds for improved road feel.

Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If
you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you
will understand this.

4-13

The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While
you are in a curve, speed is the one factor you
can control.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Both control
systems — steering and braking — have to do their
work where the tires meet the road. Unless you
have four-wheel anti-lock brakes, adding the hard
braking can demand too much of those places. You
can lose control.
The same thing can happen if you are steering through
a sharp curve and you suddenly accelerate. Those
two control systems — steering and acceleration — can
overwhelm those places where the tires meet the
road and make you lose control. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 4-9 or Enhanced Traction
System (ETS) on page 4-11.

4-14

What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the brake or accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way
you want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.

Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You
can avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.
That is the time for evasive action — steering around
the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes.
See Braking on page 4-6. It is better to remove as much
speed as you can from a possible collision. Then
steer around the problem, to the left or right depending
on the space available.

An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.

4-15

Off-Road Recovery

Passing

You may find that your right wheels have dropped
off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you
are driving.

The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:

• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides
and to crossroads for situations that might
affect your passing patterns. If you have any
doubt whatsoever about making a successful
pass, wait for a better time.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel
to go straight down the roadway.

4-16

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that
might indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your
pass. A broken center line usually indicates it
is all right to pass, providing the road ahead is
clear. Never cross a solid line on your side
of the lane or a double solid line, even if the road
seems empty of approaching traffic.

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you are awaiting an opportunity.
For one thing, following too closely reduces your
area of vision, especially if you are following
a larger vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate
space if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or
stops. Keep back a reasonable distance.

• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and
do not get too close. Time your move so
you will be increasing speed as the time comes to
move into the other lane. If the way is clear
to pass, you will have a running start that more
than makes up for the distance you would
lose by dropping back. And if something happens
to cause you to cancel your pass, you need
only slow down and drop back again and wait for
another opportunity.

• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,

• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your
inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal
and move back into the right lane. Remember that
your passenger side outside mirror is convex. The
vehicle you just passed may seem to be farther away
from you than it really is.

• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.

• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may
be slowing down or starting to turn.

• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps
you can ease a little to the right.

wait your turn. But take care that someone is not
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder and
check the blind spot.

4-17

Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the
driver has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to
steer and constantly seek an escape route or area
of less danger.

Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
If you do not have the Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
or the Traction Control System (TCS), or if the system
is off, then an acceleration skid is also best handled
by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal. See
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) on page 4-11 or
Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-9.
4-18

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you
will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including engine braking by shifting to a
lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow
on the road to make a mirrored surface — and
slow down when you have any doubt.
If you have the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),
remember: It helps avoid only the braking skid. If you do
not have ABS, then in a braking skid, where the
wheels are no longer rolling, release enough pressure
on the brakes to get the wheels rolling again. This
restores steering control. Push the brake pedal down
steadily when you have to stop suddenly. As long as the
wheels are rolling, you will have steering control.

Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.

• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare
from headlamps behind you.

• Since you cannot see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.

• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.
Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only so
much road ahead.

• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But
as we get older these differences increase. A
50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes
will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you
are driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. They may
cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also
make a lot of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark. When
you are faced with severe glare, as from a driver
who does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps, slow down a little. Avoid
staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
Keep the windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that the headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep
your eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as the headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from
night blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and
are not even aware of it.
4-19

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy
rain can make it harder to see road signs and
traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road,
and even people walking.
It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in
good shape and keep your windshield washer fluid
reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace your
windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of
streaking or missing areas on the windshield, or when
strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts.

{CAUTION:

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as well
because your tire-to-road traction is not as good as on
dry roads. And, if your tires do not have much tread
left, you will get even less traction. It is always wise to
go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while
you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when
your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.

4-20

Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you cannot, try to slow down before you
hit them.

Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in
one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is
standing on the road. If you can see reflections
from trees, telephone poles, or other vehicles, and
raindrops dimple the water’s surface, there could
be hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.

Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If
you cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water,
drive through them very slowly.

Driving Through Flowing Water

{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can
be carried away. As little as six inches of
flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle.
If this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you
pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear
room ahead, and be prepared to have your
view restricted by road spray.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 5-60.

4-21

City Driving

Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:

• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.

• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and energy.
See Freeway Driving on page 4-23.

• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.

One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.

4-22

Freeway Driving

The most important advice on freeway driving is:
Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check
traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with
the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the
prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your
mirrors, and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.

Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes, or superhighways — are the
safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.

4-23

Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in
your blind spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance.
Expect to move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do
not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive
on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce your speed
according to your speedometer, not to your sense
of motion. After driving for any distance at higher
speeds, you may tend to think you are going slower
than you actually are.

4-24

Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you are not fresh — such as after
a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles that
first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing
and shoes you can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
you will find experienced and able service experts in
GM dealerships all across North America. They will be
ready and willing to help if you need it.

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are
all windows clean inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?

• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?

• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?

• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

Highway Hypnosis
Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the
wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Do
not let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can
leave the road in less than a second, and you could
crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:

• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.

• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your
instruments frequently.

• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service, or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.

4-25

Hill and Mountain Roads

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.

• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system,
and transaxle. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.

{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let your engine assist your brakes on a
steep downhill slope.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.

4-26

• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down

{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down. They could
get so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always
have your engine running and your vehicle in
gear when you go downhill.

• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.

to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your
engine and transaxle, and you can climb the
hill better.

• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide
or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.

• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or
an accident.

• You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks
area, or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
appropriate action.

4-27

Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your trunk.
Also see Tires on page 5-60.

4-28

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And,
if you will be driving under severe conditions, include
a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple of
burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.

Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where the tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You will
have a lot less traction, or grip, and will need to be
very careful.

traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall. Try
to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
If you have the Traction Control System (TCS) or the
Enhanced Traction System (ETS), it will improve
your ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery
road. Even though your vehicle has a traction system
you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to the
road conditions. Under certain conditions, you may
want to turn the TCS or ETS off, such as when driving
through deep snow and loose gravel, to help maintain
vehicle motion at lower speeds. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 4-9 or Enhanced Traction
System (ETS) on page 4-11.
If you do not have TCS or ETS, accelerate gently. Try
not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate
too fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface
under the tires even more.

What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice
can be even more trouble because it may offer the least

Unless you have the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),
you will want to brake very gently, too. If you do
have ABS, see Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) on
page 4-7. This system improves your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road.
Whether you have ABS or not, you will want to begin
stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement.
4-29

Without ABS, if you feel your vehicle begin to slide, let
up on the brakes a little. Push the brake pedal down
steadily to get the most traction you can.
Remember, unless you have ABS, if you brake so hard
that your wheels stop rolling, you will just slide. Brake
so your wheels always keep rolling and you can
still steer.

• Whatever your braking system, allow greater
following distance on any slippery road.

• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On
an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun cannot reach, such
as around clumps of trees, behind buildings,
or under bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve
or an overpass may remain icy when the
surrounding roads are clear. If you see a patch of
ice ahead of you, brake before you are on it. Try not
to brake while you are actually on the ice, and
avoid sudden steering maneuvers.

4-30

If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:

• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.

• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,
rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.

{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.

You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.

Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and
it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.

4-31

Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help
keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do
some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until
help comes.

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you do not want to
spin your wheels too fast. The method known as rocking
can help you get out when you are stuck, but you
must use caution.

{CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can
explode, and you or others could be injured.
And, the transaxle or other parts of the vehicle
can overheat. That could cause an engine
compartment fire or other damage. When you
are stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible.
Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h)
as shown on the speedometer.
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transaxle back
and forth, you can destroy your transaxle. See
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-33.
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
see Tire Chains on page 5-77.

4-32

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out

Loading Your Vehicle

First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around your front wheels. If your vehicle
has traction control, you should turn your traction control
system off. See Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 4-9. Then shift back and forth between
REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels
as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal while
you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when
the transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinning your wheels in
the forward and reverse directions, you will cause a
rocking motion that may free your vehicle. If that does not
get you out after a few tries, you may need to be towed
out. If you do need to be towed out, see Towing Your
Vehicle on page 4-38.

It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. Two labels on your vehicle show
how much weight it may properly carry, the Tire
and Loading Information label and the Vehicle
Certification label.

{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.

4-33

Tire and Loading Information Label

The Tire and Loading Information label also lists the tire
size of the original equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For more
information on tires and inflation, see Tires on
page 5-60 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-67.
There is also important loading information on the
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for the front and rear axle, see “Certification
Label” later in this section.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is
attached to the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). With
the driver’s door open, you will find the label attached
below the door lock post (striker). The tire and
loading information label lists the number of occupant
seating positions (A), and the maximum vehicle capacity
weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.

4-34

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be
five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount
of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
may not safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load capacity
for your vehicle.
If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-40 for important information on towing a
trailer, towing safety rules, and trailering tips.

Example 1
Item
A
B
C

Description
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 1 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight =

Total
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)

4-35

Example 2
Item
A
B
C

Description
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 2 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available
Cargo Weight =

Example 3
Total

Item

1,000 lbs (453 kg)

A

750 lbs (340 kg)

B

250 lbs (113 kg)

C

Description
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 3 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available
Cargo Weight =

Total
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)

Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label
for specific information about your vehicle’s maximum
vehicle capacity weight and seating positions. The
combined weight of the driver, passengers, and cargo
should never exceed your vehicle’s maximum vehicle
capacity weight.

4-36

Certification Label

Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or
rear axle.
If the vehicle is going to carry a heavy load, spread it
out. Do not carry more than 167 lbs (76 kg) in the trunk.

{CAUTION:

A vehicle specific Certification label is found on the rear
edge of the driver’s door.
The label shows the gross weight capacity of your
vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle,
all occupants, fuel, and cargo.

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

4-37

If things like suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else
are put inside the vehicle, they will go as fast as the
vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly,
or if there is a crash, they will keep going.

{CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle. In a
trunk, put them as far forward as you can.
Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.

4-38

Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See
Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.

Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as dinghy towing, towing your vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground, and dolly towing,
towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on a device known as a dolly.
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.

Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:

Dolly Towing

• What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.

• How far will the vehicle be towed? Some vehicles
have restrictions on how far and how long they
can tow.

• Do you have the proper towing equipment? See
your dealer or trailering professional for additional
advice and equipment recommendations.

• Is the vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you would
prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you will want to
make sure the vehicle is prepared to be towed.
See Before Leaving on a Long Trip on page 4-24.

Dinghy Towing
Notice: If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain components could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not tow your vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground.
The vehicle was not designed to be towed with all
four wheels on the ground. If the vehicle must be
towed, use a dolly. See “Dolly Towing” following for
more information.

The vehicle can be towed using a dolly. To tow your
vehicle using a dolly, follow these steps:
1. Put the front wheels on the dolly.
2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).
3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position.
5. Release the parking brake.

4-39

Towing a Trailer

{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. You may also damage your
vehicle; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only if
you have followed all the steps in this section.
Ask your dealer for advice and information
about towing a trailer with your vehicle.

4-40

The vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the
proper trailer towing equipment. To identify the trailering
capacity of the vehicle, read the information in “Weight
of the Trailer” that appears later in this section. Trailering
is different than just driving the vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in handling, durability, and
fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes correct
equipment, and it has to be used properly.
That is the reason for this part. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your safety and that of
your passengers. So please read this section carefully
before pulling a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle,
wheel assemblies, and tires are forced to work harder
against the drag of the added weight. The engine
is required to operate at relatively higher speeds and
under greater loads, generating extra heat. The
trailer also adds considerably to wind resistance,
increasing the pulling requirements.

If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer

Weight of the Trailer

Here are some important points:

How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg). But
even that can be too heavy.

• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
but also where you will be driving. A good source
for this information can be state or provincial police.

• Consider using a sway control. Ask a hitch
dealer about sway controls.

• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles
(1 600 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle, or other parts could be damaged.

• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that the
vehicle tows a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle. This
helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle
wear in at the heavier loads.

• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Do not drive faster than the maximum posted
speed for trailers, or no more than 55 mph
(90 km/h), to save wear on the vehicle’s parts.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:

• The weight of the trailer
• The weight of the trailer tongue
• The total weight on your vehicle’s tires

It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature, and how much the vehicle is used to pull a
trailer are all important. It can also depend on any special
equipment that is on the vehicle, and the amount of
tongue weight the vehicle can carry. See “Weight of the
Trailer Tongue” later in this section for more information.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
Ask your dealer for our trailering information or advice,
or write us at:
Pontiac-GMC Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
4-41

Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of the vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo in it,
and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. If
there are a lot of options, equipment, passengers and
cargo in the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue weight the
vehicle can carry, which will also reduce the trailer
weight the vehicle can tow. And if towing a trailer, the
tongue load must be added to the GVW because
the vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-33 for more information about
your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.

When using a weight-carrying hitch or a
weight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should
weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer
weight (B).
After the trailer is loaded, weigh the trailer and then the
tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper.
The correct weight could be achieved simply by moving
some items around in the trailer.

4-42

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires

Safety Chains

Be sure the vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. These numbers can be found on the
Tire Loading Information label, that is on the inside of
the trunk lid. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-33.
Be sure not to go over the GVW limit for the vehicle, or
the GAWR, including the weight of the trailer tongue.
If a weight distribution hitch is used, make sure not to go
over the rear axle limit before applying the weight
distribution spring bars.

Always attach chains between the vehicle and the
trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the
trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the road if
it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions about
safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer
or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s
recommendation for attaching safety chains and do
not attach them to the bumper. Always leave just
enough slack so the rig can be turned around. And,
never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.

Hitches
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by, and rough roads are
a few reasons why the correct hitch is needed. Here
are some rules to follow:

• The rear bumper on the vehicle is not intended for
hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a frame-mounted
hitch that does not attach to the bumper.

• If any holes need to be made in the body of the
vehicle to install a trailer hitch, then be sure to seal
the holes later when the hitch is removed. If the holes
are not sealed, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from
the exhaust can get into the vehicle. See Engine
Exhaust on page 2-33. Dirt and water can, too.

Trailer Brakes
Because the vehicle has anti-lock brakes, do not try to
tap into the vehicle’s brake system. If this is done,
both brake systems will not work well, or at all.

Driving with a Trailer
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, get to know the rig.
Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and braking
with the added weight of the trailer. And always keep in
mind that the vehicle is now a good deal longer and not
nearly as responsive as the vehicle is by itself.

4-43

Before starting, check the trailer hitch and platform (and
attachments), safety chains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires, and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start the vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be
sure the brakes are working. This lets you check
the electrical connection at the same time.

Backing Up

During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.

Making Turns

Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
when driving the vehicle without a trailer. This can
prevent situations that require heavy braking and
sudden turns.

Passing
More passing distance is needed up ahead when
towing a trailer. And, because the vehicle and trailer are
a good deal longer, distances between any vehicles
that are passed must be greater, before returning to
the proper lane.

4-44

Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move that
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.

Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so the trailer will not strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees, or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well
in advance.

Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When towing a trailer, the vehicle may need a different
turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Check with
your dealer. The arrows on the instrument panel will
flash whenever signaling a turn or lane change. Properly
hooked up, the trailer lamps will also flash, telling
other drivers the vehicle and trailer are about to turn,
change lanes, or stop.

When towing a trailer, the arrows on the instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. You may think drivers behind you
are seeing the turn signal when they are not. It is
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
The vehicle has bulb warning lights. When a trailer
lighting system is plugged into the vehicle’s lighting
system, its bulb warning lights may not indicate if one of
the lamps goes out. So, when a trailer lighting system
is plugged in, be sure to check the vehicle and
trailer lamps from time to time to be sure they are all
working. Once the trailer lamps have been disconnected,
the bulb warning lights can once again indicate if
one of the vehicle lamps is out.

Parking on Hills

{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
But if the rig ever has to be parked on a hill, here is
how to do it:

Driving On Grades

1. Apply the regular brakes, but do not shift into
PARK (P) yet.

Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting
down a long or steep downgrade. If the vehicle is
not shifted down, the brakes may have to be used so
much that they would get hot and no longer work well.

2. Have someone place chocks under the
trailer wheels.

On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce the
vehicle’s speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce
the possibility of engine and transaxle overheating.
If the vehicle has overdrive, it may be driven in
THIRD (3) instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D).

3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply the parking
brake, and then shift to PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.

4-45

When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply the regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:

• Start the engine
• Shift into a gear
• Release the parking brake
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store
the chocks.

Maintenance When Trailer Towing
The vehicle will need service more often when it pulls a
trailer. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 for
more information. Things that are especially important in
trailer operation are automatic transaxle fluid, which
should not be overfilled, engine oil, drive belts, cooling,
and brake systems. Each of these is covered in this
manual, and the Index will help locate them quickly. If
trailering, it is a good idea to review this information
before starting on a trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.

Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
The cooling system may temporarily overheat during
severe operating conditions. See Engine Overheating on
page 5-28.

4-46

Section 5

Service and Appearance Care

Service ............................................................5-3
Accessories and Modifications ..........................5-3
California Proposition 65 Warning .....................5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle ..............................................5-5
Fuel ................................................................5-5
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-5
California Fuel ...............................................5-6
Additives .......................................................5-6
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-7
Filling the Tank ..............................................5-7
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .......................5-9
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10
Hood Release ..............................................5-11
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12
Engine Oil ...................................................5-16
Engine Oil Life System ..................................5-19
Supercharger Oil ..........................................5-20
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-21
Automatic Transaxle Fluid ..............................5-23
Engine Coolant .............................................5-25
Pressure Cap ...............................................5-28
Engine Overheating .......................................5-28

Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode ........................................5-30
Cooling System ............................................5-30
Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-40
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-41
Brakes ........................................................5-42
Battery ........................................................5-45
Jump Starting ...............................................5-46
Headlamp Aiming ...........................................5-50
Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-53
Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-53
Headlamps and Sidemarker Lamps .................5-54
Front Turn Signal, Parking and Fog Lamps ......5-56
Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ............5-57
Back-Up Lamps ............................................5-58
Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-59
Windshield Replacement .................................5-60
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-60
Tires ..............................................................5-60
Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................5-62
Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................5-64
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-67
Tire Inflation Monitor System ..........................5-68
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-70

5-1

Section 5

Service and Appearance Care

When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-71
Buying New Tires .........................................5-72
Different Size Tires and Wheels ......................5-73
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-74
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-75
Wheel Replacement ......................................5-75
Tire Chains ..................................................5-77
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-77
Tire Inflator Kit (GXP) ....................................5-79
Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-88
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................5-90
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire ..........................................5-91
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............5-97
Compact Spare Tire ......................................5-99
Appearance Care ............................................5-99
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .................5-99
Fabric/Carpet ..............................................5-101
Leather ......................................................5-103
Ultra Lux Suede ..........................................5-103
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces .......................................5-104
Care of Safety Belts ....................................5-104
Weatherstrips .............................................5-104

5-2

Washing Your Vehicle ..................................5-105
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ....................5-105
Finish Care ................................................5-105
Windshield and Wiper Blades .......................5-106
Aluminum Wheels .......................................5-106
Tires .........................................................5-107
Sheet Metal Damage ...................................5-107
Finish Damage ...........................................5-107
Underbody Maintenance ...............................5-108
Chemical Paint Spotting ...............................5-108
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................5-109
Vehicle Identification .....................................5-110
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ................5-110
Service Parts Identification Label ...................5-110
Electrical System ..........................................5-111
Add-On Electrical Equipment .........................5-111
Headlamp Wiring ........................................5-111
Windshield Wiper Fuses ...............................5-111
Power Windows and Other Power Options ......5-111
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ..........................5-112
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ........................5-112
Underhood Fuse Block ................................5-114
Capacities and Specifications ........................5-118

Service

Accessories and Modifications

Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer
for all your service needs. You will get genuine GM parts
and GM-trained and supported service people.

When you add non-GM accessories to your vehicle they
can affect your vehicle’s performance and safety,
including such things as, braking, stability, ride and
handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics, durability,
and electronic systems like antilock brakes, traction
control and stability control. Some of these accessories
may even cause malfunction or damage not covered
by warranty.

We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle. Your
GM dealer can accessorize your vehicle using genuine
GM Accessories. When you go to your GM dealer
and ask for GM Accessories, you will know that
GM-trained and supported service technicians will
perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.

California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.

5-3

Doing Your Own Service Work

{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.

5-4

If you want to do some of your own service work, you
will want to use the proper service manual. It tells
you much more about how to service your vehicle than
this manual can. To order the proper service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 7-14.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-65.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See Maintenance Record on page 6-14.

Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind noise
and affect windshield washer performance. Check with
your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of
your vehicle.

Fuel
The 8th digit of your vehicle identification number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies your
engine. You will find the VIN at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) on page 5-110.

Gasoline Octane
If your vehicle has the 3800 V6 engine (VIN Code 2),
use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87,
you may notice an audible knocking noise when you
drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. If you are using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, your
engine needs service.

If your vehicle has the 3800 Supercharged V6 engine
(VIN Code 4) or the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code C), use
premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 91 or higher. You may also use regular
unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, but
your vehicle’s acceleration may be slightly reduced, and
you may notice a slight audible knocking noise,
commonly referred to as spark knock. If the octane is
less than 87, you may notice a heavy knocking
noise when you drive. If this occurs, use a gasoline
rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible.
Otherwise, you might damage your engine. If you are
using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear
heavy knocking, your engine needs service.

Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM
specification D 4814 in the United States or
CAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines may
contain an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
General Motors recommends against the use of
gasolines containing MMT. See Additives on page 5-6
for additional information.

5-5

California Fuel
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See the underhood
emission control label. If this fuel is not available
in states adopting California emissions standards, your
vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission control system
performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator
lamp may turn on and your vehicle may fail a
smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-47. If this occurs, return to your authorized
GM dealer for diagnosis. If it is determined that
the condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs
may not be covered by your warranty.

Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work
properly. In most cases, you should not have to add
anything to your fuel. However, some gasolines contain
only the minimum amount of additive required to
meet U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.
To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean,
or if your vehicle experiences problems due to
5-6

dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline that is
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also, your
GM dealer has additives that will help correct and
prevent most deposit-related problems.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in
your area. General Motors recommends that you use
these gasolines if they comply with the specifications
described earlier. However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other
fuels containing more than 10% ethanol must not be used
in vehicles that were not designed for those fuels.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be covered under
your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors
recommends against the use of such gasolines. Fuels
containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs
and the performance of the emission control system may
be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn
on. If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer
for service.

Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.

Filling the Tank

{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to
you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials
away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump
unattended when refueling your vehicle — this
is against the law in some places. Keep
children away from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.

5-7

{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,
you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out
on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly
full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open
the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise
to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released
too soon, it will spring back to the right.
While refueling, let the fuel cap hang by the tether
below the fuel fill opening.

5-8

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel
from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See
Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-105.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuel
to evaporate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 3-47.

The CHECK GAS CAP message will be displayed on
the Driver Information Center (DIC) if the fuel cap is not
properly installed. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-72 for more information.

{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions
system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-47.

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.

5-9

Checking Things Under
the Hood

{CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.

5-10

{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like
fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield
washer and other fluids, and plastic or
rubber. You or others could be burned. Be
careful not to drop or spill things that will
burn onto a hot engine.

Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:

1. Pull the hood release handle with this symbol on
it. It is located inside the vehicle near the parking
brake pedal.

2. Go to the front of the vehicle and release the
secondary hood latch, located near the center front
of the engine compartment, by moving it to the right.
3. Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly.

5-11

Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the 3800 V6 Supercharged engine (3800 V6 engine similar), here is what you will see:

5-12

A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-41.
B. Battery. See Battery on page 5-45.
C. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on
page 5-46.
D. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse Block
on page 5-114.
E. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See Cooling System
on page 5-30.
F. Pressure Cap. See Pressure Cap on page 5-28.
G. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (low in engine
compartment). See Power Steering Fluid on
page 5-40.
H. Supercharger Oil Fill Location (If Equipped). See
Supercharger Oil on page 5-20.

I. Electric Cooling Fan. See Cooling System on
page 5-30.
J. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-16.
K. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-16.
L. Engine Coolant Bleed Valve. See “How to Add
Coolant to the Radiator” under Cooling System on
page 5-30.
M. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick. See “Checking
the Fluid Level” under Automatic Transaxle Fluid
on page 5-23.
N. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
under Brakes on page 5-42.
O. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-21.

5-13

When you open the hood on the 5.3L V8 engine, here is what you will see:

5-14

A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-41.
B. Battery. See Battery on page 5-45.
C. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse Block
on page 5-114.
D. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on
page 5-46.
E. Pressure Cap. See Pressure Cap on page 5-28.
F. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 5-40.
G. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-16.

H. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-16.
I. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick. See “Checking
the Fluid Level” under Automatic Transaxle Fluid
on page 5-23.
J. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
under Brakes on page 5-42.
K. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-21.
L. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See Cooling System
on page 5-30.

5-15

Checking Engine Oil

Engine Oil
If this symbol, along with
the LOW OIL LEVEL
message appears on the
Driver Information
Center (DIC), it means you
need to check the engine
oil level right away.
For more information, see LOW OIL LEVEL under DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-72.
You should check the engine oil level regularly; this is
an added reminder.

5-16

It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, the engine could be damaged.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the
engine oil fill cap.

V6 Engine

Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere
in the proper operating range in the cross-hatched
area. Push the dipstick all the way back in when you
are through.
V8 Engine
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of
the dipstick, you will need to add at least one quart/liter
of oil. But you must use the right kind. This section
explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase
capacity, see Capacities and Specifications on
page 5-118.
5-17

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use

• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should also
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).

Look for two things:

• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. You should look for and use
only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.

5-18

You should look for this information on the oil container,
and use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.

Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for the engine
at extremely low temperatures.

Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to your vehicle’s engine oil. The
recommended oils with the starburst symbol that
meet GM Standard GM6094M are all you will need for
good performance and engine protection.

Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change will be indicated can vary
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, you
must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE OIL SOON message will come
on. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-72.
Change the oil as soon as possible within the next
600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you
are driving under the best conditions, the oil life system
may not indicate that an oil change is necessary for
over a year. However, the engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and at this time the
system must be reset. Your dealer has GM-trained
service people who will perform this work using genuine
GM parts and reset the system. It is also important to
check the oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last
oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
5-19

How to Reset the Engine Oil
Life System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Anytime
the oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate
when the next oil change is required. If a situation
occurs where you change the oil prior to a CHANGE
OIL SOON message appearing on the DIC, reset
the system.
To reset the oil life system, after the oil has been
changed, use the following procedure:
1. Press the options button on the DIC until ENGINE
OIL MONITOR appears on the DIC screen.
2. Press the set/reset button to reset the system.
The next screen indicates that the engine oil
monitor system has been reset.
If the vehicle is equipped with the trip computer
DIC, when the gage button is pressed and the OIL
LIFE REMAINING mode appears, it should read
100 percent OIL LIFE REMAINING.
3. Turn the key to OFF.
If the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes back on
when you start your vehicle, the engine oil life system
has not reset. Repeat the procedure.

5-20

What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in
the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking it
to a place that collects used oil. If you have a problem
properly disposing of used oil, ask your dealer, a service
station, or a local recycling center for help.

Supercharger Oil
Because they are technically qualified and have the
proper tools, you should have your dealer perform this
maintenance.

When to Check
See Additional Required Services on page 6-6 for when
the oil level should be checked.

What Kind of Oil to Use
Use only the recommended supercharger oil. See
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from
the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a
new filter is required.
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter do the
following:

The engine air cleaner/filter is located in the engine
compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on location.

When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information. If you
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter
at each engine oil change.

3800 V6 Supercharged Engine shown, 3800 V6
Engine similar

5-21

5. To reinstall the cover, position the tabs through the
slots on the housing. If your vehicle has one of the
3800 V6 engines, a notch on the sides of the
filter cover will indicate the correct engagement.
6. Push the cover tabs on top of the housing to lock
the cover in place.

{CAUTION:

5.3L V8 Engine
1. Lift the filter cover tabs on top of the engine air
cleaner/filter housing.
2. Push the filter cover housing toward the engine.

Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned. The
air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to
stop flames if the engine backfires. If it is
not there and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.

3. Pull out the filter.
4. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.

5-22

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you
are driving.

Automatic Transaxle Fluid
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transaxle Fluid
A good time to check the automatic transaxle fluid level
is when the engine oil is changed.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
Additional Required Services on page 6-6, and be sure
to use the transaxle fluid listed in Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.

How to Check Automatic
Transaxle Fluid
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you
may choose to have this done at the dealership
service department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.

Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage the
transaxle. Too much can mean that some of the fluid
could come out and fall on hot engine or exhaust
system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid could
cause the transaxle to overheat. Be sure to get an
accurate reading if you check the transaxle fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxle
fluid level if you have been driving:

•
•
•
•

When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
At high speed for quite a while.
In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
While pulling a trailer.

To get the right reading, the fluid should be at
normal operating temperature, which is 180°F to
200°F (82°C to 93°C).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about
15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures are
above 50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C),
you may have to drive longer.

5-23

Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare the vehicle as follows:

2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.

1. Park the vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the
shift lever through each gear, pausing for about
three seconds in each one. Then, position the shift
lever in PARK (P).
4. Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow
these steps:
The transaxle fluid dipstick
handle has this symbol on
it, and is located near
the rear of the engine
compartment. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for more
information on location.
1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or
paper towel.

5-24

3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the
lower level. The fluid level must be in the
crosshatched area.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way.

How to Add Automatic Transaxle Fluid

Engine Coolant

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
what kind of transaxle fluid to use. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.

The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in the vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if only
DEX-COOL® extended life coolant is added.
The following explains the cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If there is a problem
with engine overheating or if coolant needs to be added
to the radiator, see Engine Overheating on page 5-28.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® engine coolant will:
• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
• Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.

If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level into the crosshatched area on
the dipstick.
1. Pull out the dipstick.
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at the
dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.
It does not take much fluid, generally less than
one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transaxle
fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by your warranty. Always
use the automatic transaxle fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check Automatic
Transaxle Fluid,” earlier in this section.
4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at the first maintenance
service after each 25,000 miles (41 500 km) or
24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
5-25

What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® engine coolant which will
not damage aluminum parts. If this coolant mixture is
used, nothing else needs to be added.

{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

5-26

Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
If coolant needs to be added more than four times a
year, have your dealer check the cooling system.
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or additives
in your vehicle’s cooling system, you could
damage your vehicle. Use only the proper mixture
of the engine coolant listed in this manual for
the cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-12 for more information.

Checking Coolant
The coolant recovery tank
cap has this symbol on it.

If the coolant recovery tank is completely empty, add
coolant to the radiator. See Engine Overheating
on page 5-28.

{CAUTION:

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for more information on the location of the coolant
recovery tank.

Turning the pressure cap when the engine and
radiator are hot can allow steam and scalding
liquids to blow out and burn you badly. With the
coolant recovery tank, you will almost never
have to add coolant at the radiator. Never turn
the pressure cap — even a little — when the
engine and radiator are hot.

The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking
the coolant level.

{CAUTION:

When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
the cold fill line or a little higher. The cold fill line is
marked with the same symbol as the coolant recovery
tank cap.

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.

Adding Coolant
If more coolant is needed, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank, but be
careful not to spill it.

Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator. For
information on how to add coolant to the radiator,
see Cooling System on page 5-30.
5-27

Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur.
Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on location.

Engine Overheating
There is a coolant temperature gage and a warning light
on the instrument panel that indicate an overheated
engine condition. See Engine Coolant Temperature
Gage on page 3-46 and Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light on page 3-46.

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay
away from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it. Just turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
See Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode on page 5-30 for information on driving
to a safe place in an emergency.

5-28

Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. See Overheated Engine
Protection Operating Mode on page 5-30 for
information on driving to a safe place in an
emergency.

If No Steam is Coming From Your
Engine
An overheat warning can indicate a serious problem.
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or
hear no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:

•
•
•
•

Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer.

If an overheat warning occurs without any sign of
steam, try this for a minute or so:
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
engine idle.
2. Set the heater at the highest setting and the fan at
the highest speed and open the windows as
necessary.
If the overheat warning no longer exists, the vehicle can
be driven. Just to be safe, drive slower for about
10 minutes. If the warning does not come back on, the
vehicle can be driven normally.
If the warning continues, and you have not stopped, pull
over, stop, and park the vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, idle the engine for
three minutes while parked. If the warning is still there,
turn off the engine and get everyone out of the
vehicle until it cools down. Also, see “Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode” later in this section.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.

5-29

Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
The overheated engine protection operating mode
allows the vehicle to be driven to a safe place in an
emergency situation. If an overheated engine condition
exists, this protection mode alternates firing groups
of cylinders to help prevent engine damage. In
this mode, there will be a significant loss in power and
engine performance. The engine coolant temperature
gage indicator will move to the shaded area, and
the engine coolant temperature warning light will come
on, showing that an overheated engine condition
exists. Driving extended miles (km) and/or towing a
trailer in the overheated engine protection mode should
be avoided.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any
repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.
Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil and
reset the oil life system. See Engine Oil on
page 5-16.

5-30

Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:

3800 V6 Supercharged Engine shown, 3800 V6
Engine similar
A. Coolant Recovery Tank
B. Electric Engine Cooling Fan(s)
C. Pressure Cap

{CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling,
do not do anything else until it cools down. The
vehicle should be parked on a level surface.
5.3L V8 Engine
A. Pressure Cap
B. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
C. Coolant Recovery Tank

The coolant recovery tank is located in the rear of the
engine compartment on the passenger’s side of the
vehicle on the 3800 V6 engines. The coolant recovery
tank on the 5.3L V8 engine is located in the rear of
the engine compartment on the driver’s side of
the vehicle, behind the engine air cleaner/filter.

5-31

When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
or above the cold fill line on the coolant recovery
tank. To check the coolant level, look for the cold fill line
on the side of the coolant recovery tank that faces the
engine. If the level is not correct, there may be a leak at
the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses, heater
hoses, radiator, water pump, or somewhere else in the
cooling system.

{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If
you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive
the vehicle.

5-32

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check
to see if the electric engine cooling fan(s) are running.
If the engine is overheating, the fan(s) should be
running. If the fan(s) are not running, the vehicle
needs service.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty. See
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on
page 5-30 for information on driving to a safe place
in an emergency.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.

How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank

{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

If you have not found a problem yet, but the coolant
level is not at the cold fill line, add a 50/50 mixture
of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® engine
coolant at the coolant recovery tank. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-25 for more information.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.

{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
When the coolant level in the coolant recovery tank is at
the cold fill line, start the vehicle.

5-33

If the overheat warning continues, there is one more
thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant
mixture directly to the radiator, but be sure the system
is cool before you do it.

{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the
pressure cap — even a little — they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the pressure cap, is
hot. Wait for the cooling system and pressure
cap to cool if you ever have to turn the
pressure cap.

How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
(3800 V6 Engines)
Notice: Your engine has a specific radiator fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause your engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.

5-34

3800 V6 Supercharged Engine shown, 3800 V6
Engine similar
1. You can remove the pressure cap when the cooling
system, including the pressure cap and upper
radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the cap slowly
counterclockwise.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means there is still some pressure left.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap and remove it.

{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
3. Remove the Series III V6 engine cover shield to
access the bleed valve.
3.1. Clean the area around the engine oil fill tube
and cap before removing. Twist the oil fill
tube, with cap attached, counterclockwise
and remove it.

3800 V6 Engine

5-35

4. After the engine cools,
open the coolant air
bleed valve located on
the thermostat
housing near the
heater hose.

Thermostat Housing

3800 V6 Supercharged Engine
3.2. Lift the engine cover shield at the front, slide
the catch tab out of the engine bracket and
remove the cover shield.
3.3. Put the oil fill tube, with cap attached, in the
valve cover oil fill hole until you are ready to
replace the cover shield.

5-36

6. Rinse or wipe any spilled coolant from the engine
and the compartment.
7. Replace the 3800 Series III V6 engine cover shield.
7.1. Remove the oil fill tube, with cap attached,
from the valve cover.
7.2. Insert the catch tab on the cover shield
under the bracket on the engine.
7.3. Place the hole in the cover shield over the
hole in the valve cover. Install oil fill tube and
cap by twisting clockwise.
8. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the cold
fill line.
3800 V6 Supercharged Engine shown, 3800 V6
Engine similar

9. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, but
leave the pressure cap off.

5. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler
neck. See Engine Coolant on page 5-25 for more
information about the proper coolant mixture.
If you see a stream of coolant coming from the air
bleed valve, close the valve. Otherwise, close
the valve after the radiator is filled.

5-37

11. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator
filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture
through the filler neck until the level reaches
the base of the filler neck.
12. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during
this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the
filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure
the pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
13. Check the coolant in the recovery tank. The level in
the coolant recovery tank should be at the cold fill
line when the engine is cold.

3800 V6 Supercharged Engine shown, 3800 V6
Engine similar
10. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan(s).

5-38

How to Add Coolant to the Cooling
System (5.3L V8 Engine)
Notice: Your engine has a specific cooling system
drain and fill procedure. Failure to follow this
procedure could cause your engine to overheat
and be severely damaged. If your engine’s cooling
system needs to be drained and re-filled, please see
your dealer.
You can remove the
pressure cap when the
cooling system, including
the pressure cap and
upper radiator hose is no
longer hot. Turn the
pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise.

{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
3. Fill the cooling system with the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler neck.
See Engine Coolant on page 5-25 for more
information about the proper coolant mixture.
4. Rinse or wipe any spilled coolant from the engine
and the compartment.
5. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the cold
fill line.
6. Install the coolant recovery tank cap and the
pressure cap.

1. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means that there is still some pressure left.

7. If the coolant in the recovery tank is constantly low,
you should have a dealership service department
inspect your vehicle for leaks.

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap to remove the
pressure cap.

5-39

Power Steering Fluid
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
reservoir location.

How to Check Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on
the dipstick
The fluid level should be between the ADD and HOT
marks when the engine is cold.

When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering
fluid unless a leak is suspected in the system, or
an unusual noise is heard. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.

When the engine compartment is hot, the level should
be at the HOT mark.
If the fluid is at the ADD mark when the engine is cold
or hot, power steering fluid should be added.

What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.

5-40

Windshield Washer Fluid

Notice:

• When using concentrated washer fluid,

What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will
be operating the vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing.

Adding Washer Fluid
When the windshield washer fluid reservoir is low,
a LOW WASHER FLUID message along with the
washer symbol, comes on in the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-72 for more information.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it. Add
washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for reservoir
location.

follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.

• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your washer
system and paint.

5-41

Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the
reservoir.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the
brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,
the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is
that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you
should have your brake system fixed, since a leak
means that sooner or later your brakes will not work
well, or will not work at all.

5-42

So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you will have too
much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should
add or remove brake fluid, as necessary, only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.

{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.
When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your brake
warning light will come on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-42.

What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
only. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 6-12.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help
keep dirt from entering the reservoir.

{CAUTION:

Notice:

• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
system parts. For example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your
brake system can damage brake system parts so
badly that they will have to be replaced. Do not
let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.

• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If
you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing
Your Vehicle on page 5-105.

With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or they
may not even work at all. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.

5-43

Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed. The sound
may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle
is moving, except when you are pushing on the
brake pedal firmly.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a
brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to GM torque specifications.

{CAUTION:

Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.

The brake wear warning sound means
that soon your brakes will not work well.
That could lead to an accident. When you hear
the brake wear warning sound, have your
vehicle serviced.

Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.

Brake Adjustment
Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the
vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.

5-44

Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your
vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality
GM brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system — for example, when your brake linings wear
down and you need new ones put in — be sure you get
new approved GM replacement parts. If you do not,
your brakes may no longer work properly. For example,
if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for
your vehicle, the balance between your front and rear
brakes can change — for the worse. The braking
performance you have come to expect can change in
many other ways if someone puts in the wrong
replacement brake parts.

Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands
after handling.
If the battery has a very low charge or is dead, you may
not be able to remove the ignition key from the ignition
switch or shift out of PARK (P). Refer to Shifting
Out of Park (P) on page 2-32.

Vehicle Storage
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative (−) cable from
the battery. This will help keep the battery from
running down.

Battery

{CAUTION:

Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
time for a new battery, get one that has the replacement
number shown on the original battery’s label. We
recommend an ACDelco® replacement battery. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
battery location.

Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
are not careful. See Jump Starting on
page 5-46 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.

5-45

Jump Starting
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may want to
use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start
your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do
it safely.

{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode
or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.

5-46

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transaxle in PARK (P) or a manual transaxle in
NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.

If your vehicle has one of
the 3800 V6 engines, to
uncover the remote
positive (+) terminal, press
the tab at the bottom of
the fuse block and lift
the cover up.

Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlet. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that are not needed. This
will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And
it could save the radio!
4. Open the hood on the other vehicle and locate the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
that vehicle.
You will not use your vehicle’s battery for jump
starting. It has a remote positive (+) jump starting
terminal, located on the underhood fuse block,
for that purpose.

3800 V6 and 3800 V6
Supercharged Engines

5-47

If your vehicle has the
5.3L V8 engine, to uncover
the remote positive (+)
terminal, remove the fuse
block cover.

{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.

{CAUTION:
5.3L V8 Engine
Always use the remote positive (+) terminal instead
of the positive (+) terminal on the battery. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on location.

{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you. Keep
hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.

5-48

Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you do not, explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.

5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−), or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal location on the vehicle with the dead
battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal location on the vehicle with
the good battery. Use a remote positive (+)
terminal if the vehicle has one.

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal location on the vehicle with
the good battery. Use a remote negative (−) terminal
if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (–) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably
needs service.

5-49

Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.

To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
5. Return the remote positive (+) terminal cover to its
original position.

Headlamp Aiming
The vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming
system. The aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment.

Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-50

However, If the vehicle is damaged in an accident, the
headlamp aim may be affected and adjustment may
be necessary.
If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams at you, this
may also mean the vertical aim needs to be adjusted.

It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to your
dealer for service if the headlamps need to be re-aimed.
It is possible however, to re-aim the headlamps as
described in the following procedure.

Headlamp aiming is done with the low-beam headlamps.
The high-beam headlamps will be correctly aimed if
the low-beam headlamps are aimed properly.
To adjust the vertical aim, do the following:

The vehicle should be properly prepared as follows:

• The vehicle should be placed so the headlamps are
25 ft. (7.6 m) from a light colored wall or other flat
surface.

• The vehicle must have all four tires on a perfectly
level surface which is level all the way to the wall
or other flat surface.

• The vehicle should be placed so it is perpendicular
to the wall or other flat surface.

• The vehicle should not have any snow, ice, or
mud on it.

• The vehicle should be fully assembled and all other
work stopped while headlamp aiming is being done.

• The vehicle should be normally loaded with a
full tank of fuel and one person or 160 lbs (75 kg)
sitting on the driver’s seat.

• Tires should be properly inflated.

1. Find the aim dot on the lens of the low-beam lamp.
2. Measure the distance from the ground to the aim
dot on the lamp. Record the distance.
3. At the wall or other flat surface, measure from the
ground upward the recorded distance from Step 2
and draw or tape a horizontal line the width of
the vehicle.

5-51

4. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a
piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the
headlamp not being aimed. This should allow only
the beam of light from the headlamp being
aimed to be seen on the flat surface.
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam
cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up which may cause
damage to the headlamp.

5-52

Driver’s Side shown
5. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws, which
are under the hood, near the headlamps. Turn the
vertical aiming screw until the headlamp beam
is aimed to the horizontal tape line.
The adjustment screws can be turned with a 6 mm
hex key bit socket or a 6 mm hex key.

Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
Replacement Bulbs on page 5-59.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:
6. Ensure the top edge of the cut-off is positioned at
the bottom edge of the horizontal tape line.
7. Repeat Steps 4 through 6 for the opposite
headlamp.

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside
and can burst if you drop or scratch the
bulb. You or others could be injured. Be
sure to read and follow the instructions on
the bulb package.

5-53

Headlamps and Sidemarker Lamps
To replace a headlamp or sidemarker bulb, do the
following:
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-11
for more information.

2. Locate the metal retaining clip. Remove the bolt.

A. High-Beam Headlamp
B. Low-Beam Headlamp
C. Sidemarker Lamp

5-54

3. Pull up half-way on the metal retaining clip
while pushing rearward on the headlamp.
Align the square cut-out on the retaining clip with
the notch on the headlamp.

4. Pull the headlamp assembly straight out from the
vehicle. (Moving the headlamp up and down
slightly may help with its removal.)

A. High-Beam Headlamp
B. Low-Beam Headlamp
C. Sidemarker Lamp
5. Turn the bulb socket ring one-quarter of a turn
counterclockwise to remove it from the headlamp
assembly.
6. Pull the old bulb from the socket.
7. Place the new bulb into the socket.
8. Turn the bulb socket ring one-quarter turn clockwise
to reinstall it back into the headlamp assembly.

5-55

9. Carefully reinstall the headlamp assembly.
10. Push down on the metal retaining clip while pushing
rearward on the headlamp, making sure the
headlamp assembly is secure.
11. Reinstall the bolt and tighten to secure.

Front Turn Signal, Parking and
Fog Lamps
The front turn signal, parking, and fog lamps (if
equipped) are located below the headlamp assembly.

To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:
1. Follow Steps 1 through 4 of the headlamp
replacement procedure. See Headlamps and
Sidemarker Lamps on page 5-54 for more
information.
2. Locate the front turn
signal/parking lamp (all
models) and fog
lamp bulbs (if
equipped), which are
located below the
headlamp assembly.

The arrow indicates which is the turn signal/parking
lamp bulb. The fog lamp bulb is below it, if your
vehicle has this bulb. If you need to have fog lamp
bulb replaced, see your dealer for service.
3. Turn the bulb socket one-quarter of a turn
counterclockwise to remove it from its assembly.
A. Front Turn Signal/Parking Lamp
B. Fog Lamp (If Equipped)

5-56

4. Pull the old bulb from the socket and replace it with
a new one.
5. Turn the bulb socket a quarter turn clockwise to
reinstall it.

6. Reinstall the headlamp assembly.
7. Push down on the metal retaining clip while pushing
rearward on the headlamp, making sure the
headlamp assembly is secure.
8. Reinstall the bolt and tighten to secure.

Taillamps, Turn Signal, and
Stoplamps

2. Remove the convenience net, if equipped, by
removing the net hook attachments.
3. Remove the plastic cap from the trunk trim.
4. Pull the trunk trim and carpet away from the back of
the trunk.
5. Remove the bottom bolt and two nuts.
6. Remove the taillamp
assembly by pulling it
out from the vehicle.

A. Taillamp
B. Taillamps, Turn Signal
and Stoplamps

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-13 for more
information.

5-57

7. Turn the appropriate
lamp socket a quarter
turn counterclockwise
and remove it.

Back-Up Lamps
The back-up lamps are located on the trunk lid.

To replace the back-up lamp bulb(s), do the following:
8. Remove the old bulb.
9. Replace with a new bulb into the socket and turn
the lamp socket clockwise to install it.
10. Reinstall the taillamp assembly by reversing
Steps 2 through 5.

5-58

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-13 for
more information.

Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamps
Back-Up Lamp
Front Parking/Turn Signal Lamp

Bulb Number
3157
3757 KA* or
5702 KA**
194

Front Sidemarker
Headlamps
High-Beam Halogen
9005
Low-Beam Halogen
9006
Stop/Taillamp/Turn Signal Lamps
3057
* GT and Base Models with the Optional Fog Lamps
* For Lamps Not Equipped with the Fog Function and
GXP Models
2. Turn the appropriate lamp socket a quarter turn
counterclockwise and remove it.
3. Remove the old bulb.

For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact
your dealer.

4. Put the new bulb into the lamp socket.
5. Turn the bulb a quarter turn clockwise to reinstall it.

5-59

Windshield Replacement
If your vehicle is equipped with the Head-Up
Display (HUD) system, keep in mind that your
windshield is part of the HUD system. If you ever have
to get your windshield replaced, be sure to get one
that is designed for HUD or your HUD image may look
blurred or out of focus.

Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
for more information on wiper blade inspection.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For the proper type and
length, see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 6-13. Here’s how to remove the wiper blade:
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm connector away from
the windshield.

5-60

2. While holding the wiper arm, pull the clip up from
the blade connecting point, and pull the blade
assembly down toward the windshield to remove it
from the wiper arm.
3. Install the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm and
snap the clip into place.

Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additional
information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet
included with your vehicle’s owner manual.

Low-Profile Performance Tire (GXP)

{CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-33.
• Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The resulting
accident could cause serious injury. Check
all tires frequently to maintain the
recommended pressure. Tire pressure
should be checked when your tires are
cold. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-67.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut,
punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.

If your vehicle has P255/45R18 size tires on the front
wheels and P225/50R18 size tires on the rear wheels,
they are classified as low-profile performance tires.
These tires are designed for very responsive driving on
wet or dry pavement. You may also notice more
road noise with low-profile performance tires and that
they tend to wear faster.
Notice: If your vehicle has low-profile tires, they
are more susceptible to damage from road hazards
or curb impact than standard profile tires. Tire
and/or wheel assembly damage can occur when
coming into contact with road hazards like,
potholes, or sharp edged objects, or when sliding
into a curb. Your GM warranty does not cover
this type of damage. Keep tires set to the correct
inflation pressure and, when possible avoid contact
with curbs, potholes, and other road hazards.

5-61

Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical passenger
vehicle tire and a compact spare tire sidewall.

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT (Department of Transportation)
code is the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The
TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code, tire size,
and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one side
may have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of letters
and numbers used to define a particular tire’s width,
height, aspect ratio, construction type, and service
description. See the “Tire Size” illustration later in this
section for more detail.
5-62

(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on
three performance factors: treadwear, traction,
and temperature resistance. For more information see
Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-74.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load.

(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and
plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured.
The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although
only one side may have the date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or compact
spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa).
For more information on tire pressure and inflation see
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-67.
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare tire or
temporary use tire has a tread life of approximately
3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should not be driven
at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h). The compact spare
tire is for emergency use when a regular road tire
has lost air and gone flat. If your vehicle has a compact
spare tire, see Compact Spare Tire on page 5-99
and If a Tire Goes Flat on page 5-77.

(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and numbers
define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type and service description. The letter T as the
first character in the tire size means the tire is for
temporary use only.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
5-63

Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a typical
passenger vehicle tire size.

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The
letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D means
diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter B means
belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as the
first character in the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire
and Rim Association.

(F) Service Description: These characters represent
the load range and speed rating of the tire. The load
index represents the load carry capacity a tire is certified
to carry. The load index can range from 1 to 279. The
speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified
to carry a load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.

Tire Terminology and Definitions

(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure
is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascal (kPa).

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates
the tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if
the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as shown in item C of
the illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is
60 percent as high as it is wide.

Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight
of optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air
conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to
its width.

5-64

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made
from steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are
laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-67.
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment including
the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation (DOT) motor vehicle
safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire
Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator
which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production
plant, brand and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, see Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-33.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front
axle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-33.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-33.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty
trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity
of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb
weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;
and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a
vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg).
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-33.
5-65

Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces
outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire
that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or
bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding
that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on
the other sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger
cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure and
shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-67 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-33.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords
that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a
tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire
can operate.
5-66

Traction: The friction between the tire and the road
surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of a tire
when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-71.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards): A
tire information system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature, and treadwear.
Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are molded
into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality
Grading on page 5-74.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg) plus
the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-33.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,
occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight and
the original equipment tire size and recommended
inflation pressure. See “Tire and Loading Information
Label” under Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-33.

Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is not.
If your tires do not have enough air (under-inflation),
you can get the following:

•
•
•
•
•
•

Premature or irregular wear

For additional information regarding how much weight
your vehicle can carry, and an example of the tire
and loading information label, see Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-33. How you load your vehicle affects
vehicle handling and ride comfort, never load your
vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry.

Poor handling

When to Check

Reduced fuel economy

Check your tires once a month or more. Do not forget to
check the compact spare tire, it should be at 60 psi
(420 kPa). For additional information regarding
the compact spare tire, see Compact Spare Tire on
page 5-99.

Too much flexing
Too much heat
Tire overloading

If your tires have too much air (over-inflation), you
can get the following:

•
•
•
•

A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the
vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar), below the driver’s
door latch. This label shows your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressures for
your tires when they are cold. The recommended
cold tire inflation pressure, shown on the label, is the
minimum amount of air pressure needed to support your
vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.

Unusual wear
Poor handling
Rough ride
Needless damage from road hazards

5-67

How to Check

Tire Inflation Monitor System

Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires
may look properly inflated even when they are
under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressure when
the tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle has
been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more
than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Your vehicle may have the Tire Inflation Monitor
System (TIMS). The system is designed to alert the
driver when there is a large air pressure change in
one tire, while the vehicle is being driven. TIMS detects
differences in tire rotation speeds that are caused by
changes in tire pressure. The system can alert you
about a low tire but it does not replace normal
tire maintenance. See Tires on page 5-60. The TIMS
learns the pressure at each tire throughout the operating
speed range of the vehicle. The system normally
takes between 45 and 90 minutes of driving to learn the
tire pressures. This time may be longer depending on
individual driving habits. Learning need not be
accumulated during a single trip. Once learned, the
system will remember the tire pressures until the
system is reset.

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press
the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches
the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading
Information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If
the inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach
the recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the
metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Re-check the
tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.

5-68

This symbol, along with the
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
warning message, will
appear in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) if
the pressure in one tire
becomes 12 psi (83 kPa)
lower than the other
three tires.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-72 for
more information.
The tire inflation monitor system will not alert you if the
pressure in more than one tire is low, if the system
is not properly calibrated, or if the vehicle is moving
faster than 70 mph (110 km/h).
When the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning message
comes on, stop as soon as possible and check all
the tires for damage. If a tire is flat, see If a Tire Goes
Flat on page 5-77. Also, check the tire pressure in
all four tires as soon as possible. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-67.

The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning message will
also be displayed, while the ignition is on, until the
system is reset. To reset the system, see “Tire Inflation
Monitor System” under the options mode in DIC
Controls and Displays (Base Level DIC) on page 3-52
or DIC Controls and Displays (Uplevel DIC with Trip
Computer) on page 3-60.
Do not reset the tire inflation monitor system without
first correcting the cause of the problem and checking
and adjusting the pressure in all four tires. If the
system is reset when the tire pressures are incorrect,
the system will not work properly and may not respond
when a tire is low.
The tire inflation monitor system will need to be reset
any time a tire’s pressure is adjusted, the tires are
rotated, or one or more tires is repaired or replaced. The
system will also need to be reset when new tires are
purchased for the vehicle and when the battery
has been disconnected.

5-69

Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tire rotation is not recommended if your vehicle is a
GXP model equipped with P255/45R18 size tires on
the front wheels and P225/50R18 size tires on the rear
wheels. Different tire sizes front to rear should not
be rotated.
Tire rotation is recommended if the original equipment
tires installed on your vehicle are of the same size
and type on all four tire/wheel positions. Original
equipment tires of the same size and type should be
rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles (8 000 to 13 000 km).

Rotation Pattern for Non-GXP Tires Only

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your vehicle’s
tires as soon as possible and check the wheel
alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See
When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-71 and
Wheel Replacement on page 5-75 for more information.

The correct rotation pattern shown here is only for
non-GXP tires.

The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation
is the most important. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4 for scheduled rotation intervals.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label, and reset the Tire Inflation
Monitor System. See Tire Inflation Monitor System
on page 5-68 for additional information.

5-70

Do not include the compact spare tire, if equipped, in
your vehicle’s tire rotation.

Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened.
See “Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-118.

When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.

{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all
the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire on
page 5-88.

You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:

• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.

• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.

• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.

• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
5-71

Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for your
vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on
your vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification
(TPC spec) system rating. If you need replacement
tires, GM strongly recommends that you get tires with
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle
will continue to have tires that are designed to give the
same performance and vehicle safety, during normal
use, as the original tires.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall
performance of your vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire
pressure monitoring performance. GM’s TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire’s sidewall by the
tire manufacturer. If the tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC spec number will be followed by an MS
for mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on
page 5-62 for additional information.

5-72

{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes
(other than those originally installed on your
vehicle), brands, or types (radial and
bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not handle
properly, and you could have a crash. Using
tires of different sizes (other than those
originally installed on your vehicle) may also
cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use
the correct size, brand, and type tires on all
wheels. If your vehicle has a compact spare
tire, it is all right to drive your vehicle with the
compact spare temporarily. It was developed
for use on your vehicle. See Compact Spare
Tire on page 5-99.

Different Size Tires and Wheels

{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those that
do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they
are the same size, load range, speed rating, and
construction type (radial and bias-belted tires) as your
vehicle’s original tires.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on the
Tire and Loading Information Label. This label is
attached to the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). See
Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-33, for more information
about the Tire and Loading Information Label and its
location on your vehicle.

If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability and
resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle
has electronic systems such as, antilock brakes; traction
control; and electronic stability control, the performance
of these systems can be affected.

{CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle
may not provide an acceptable level of
performance and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels are selected.
You may increase the chance that you will
crash and suffer serious injury. Only use GM
specific wheel and tire systems developed for
your vehicle, and have them properly installed
by a GM certified technician.
See Buying New Tires on page 5-72 and Accessories
and Modifications on page 5-3 for additional information.

5-73

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This
applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.

5-74

Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature – A, B, C

Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.

The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the
longest tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will
not be necessary on a regular basis. However, if
you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to
one side or the other, the alignment may need to
be checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when
driving on a smooth road, your tires and wheels
may need to be rebalanced. See your dealer for
proper diagnosis.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.

5-75

Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM
original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to
have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for your vehicle.

{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.

5-76

Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-88 for more
information.

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has been
used or how far it has been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.

Tire Chains

{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has P225/55R17, P255/45R18 or
P225/50R18 size tires, do not use tire chains,
there is not enough clearance.
Tire chains used on a vehicle without the
proper amount of clearance can cause damage
to the brakes, suspension or other vehicle
parts. The area damaged by the tire chains
could cause you to lose control of your vehicle
and you or others may be injured in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do
not spin your wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit,
install them on the front tires.

Notice: If your vehicle does not have P225/55R17,
P255/45R18 or P225/50R18 size tires, use tire chains
only where legal and only when you must. Use only
SAE Class S-type chains that are the proper size for
your tires. Install them on the front tires and tighten
them as tightly as possible with the ends securely
fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the
chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten
them. If the contact continues, slow down until it
stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with
chains on will damage your vehicle.

If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. See
Tires on page 5-60. If air goes out of a tire, it is much
more likely to leak out slowly. But if you should ever
have a blowout, here are a few tips about what to expect
and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.

5-77

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you’d use
in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, and your vehicle has a spare tire, see
Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-88. This information
shows you how to use your vehicle’s tire changing
equipment and how to change a flat tire safely.

If a Tire Goes Flat (GXP)
GXP models have no spare tire, no tire changing
equipment, and no place for storing a spare or flat tire. If a
tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by
driving slowly to a level place and stopping. Then do this:
1. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 3-6.
2. Park your vehicle. Set the parking brake firmly and
put the shift lever in PARK (P). See Shifting Into
Park (P) on page 2-31 for additional information.
3. Turn off the engine.

{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.

5-78

4. Inspect the flat tire.
If the tire has been separated from the wheel or has
damaged sidewalls or large tears that allow rapid
air loss, call a tire repair facility. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 7-6.
If the flat tire is due to a slow leak caused by a nail or
other similar road hazard, the tire inflator kit may be used
to temporarily repair the damaged tire. The kit uses a
liquid tire sealant to seal small punctures in the tread area
of the tire. The flat tire is then inflated to at least 30 psi
(207 kPa) and driven to evenly distribute the tire sealant.

The tire pressure is checked after driving for a maximum
of five miles (8.0 km) to see if the slow leak has been
stopped. If the tire pressure is 19 psi (131 kPa) or more,
inflate the tire up to the standard operating pressure as
shown on the tire and loading information label. This label
is attached to the vehicle’s center-pillar below the driver’s
door latch. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-67.
Notice: If the tire pressure has dropped below
19 psi (131 kPa), the vehicle should not be driven.
Damage to the tire may be severe and the sealant
will not be effective. Contact Roadside Assistance,
see Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.
You should have the damaged tire repaired as soon as
possible. The tire sealant is a temporary repair only.
If the tire has been filled with tire sealant, take the tire to
a GM dealer for inspection and repair. See Tire
Inflator Kit (GXP) on page 5-79 for additional
information.

Tire Inflator Kit (GXP)
Your vehicle may have a tire inflator kit. The kit uses a
liquid tire sealant and air at the same time to seal small
punctures in the tread area of the tire. Be sure to read
and follow all the tire inflator kit instructions. The kit
includes the following:

E. Air Pressure Gage
A. Air Compressor
F. Air Compressor
B. Tire Sealant Canister
Inflator Hose
C. Air Compressor
G. Sealant Filling Hose
Accessory Plug
D. On/Off Switch
If the flat tire is due to a slow leak caused by a nail or
other similar road hazard, the tire inflator kit may
be used to temporarily repair the damaged tire.
After temporarily repairing a tire with the tire inflator kit,
take your vehicle to an authorized GM dealer to
have the tire inspected and repaired.
5-79

Accessing the Tire Inflator Kit
To access the tire inflator kit, do the following:
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-13 for more
information.
2. Locate the tire inflator kit by lifting up the carpet.
3. Remove the inflator
kit cover by turning
the center nut
counterclockwise.

4. Remove the inflator kit by pulling it straight out of
the foam container.

5-80

Tire Sealant

Using the Tire Inflator Kit

The kit contains a liquid sealant that when injected into a
flat tire, may temporarily repair nail holes or cuts in the
tread area of the tire. The tire sealant cannot repair tire
damage caused while driving on a flat tire or a tire that
has had a “blow out” or a tire that has punctures in the
sidewall areas. The tire sealant solution is to be used for
a single tire and can only be used once.

To use the tire inflator kit, do the following:

Check the tire sealant expiration date on the sealant
canister. The sealant may not be as effective beyond the
expiration date. If needed, see your GM dealer for a
replacement canister.
After temporarily repairing a tire using the tire sealant,
take your vehicle to an authorized GM dealer to have the
tire inspected and repaired.

1. Place the inflator kit on the ground and unwrap the
sealant filling hose from the compressor.
2. Remove the air compressor accessory plug from
the unit. To do this, pull the top portion of the
wrapped cord out first, then the bottom, then unsnap
the plug. Do not insert the plug into an accessory
outlet yet.
3. Remove the valve stem cap from the flat tire by
turning it counterclockwise.
If an object, such as a nail, has penetrated the tire,
do not remove it.

5-81

{CAUTION:
Idling the engine in a closed-in place or with
the climate control system off can cause
deadly carbon monoxide (CO). See Engine
Exhaust on page 2-33.
6. Start the vehicle. See Starting the Engine on
page 2-23 for more information. The vehicle must be
running while using the air compressor.

{CAUTION:
4. Attach the sealant filling hose (A) onto the tire valve
stem. Turn it clockwise until it is tight.
Make sure the inflator kit on/off switch (B) is in the
O (off) position.
5. Plug the air compressor accessory plug (C) into an
accessory power outlet in the vehicle. See
Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 3-24 for more
information.

5-82

Inflating something too much can make it
explode, and you or others could be injured.
Be sure to read the inflator instructions, and
inflate the tire to its recommended pressure.
Do not exceed 36 psi (248 kPa).
7. Move the inflator kit switch to the I (on) position.
The inflator kit will force sealant and air into the
tire. Sealant may leak from the puncture hole until
the vehicle is driven and the hole has sealed.

8. Make sure there is a proper connection between
the tire valve stem and the sealant filling hose by
looking at the air pressure gage. If there is not
a pressure reading while the compressor is running,
the connection between the inflator kit and the
tire is bad.
Check the attachment between the sealant filling
hose and the tire valve stem.
9. Inflate the tire up to the recommended inflation
pressure, found on the Tire and Loading Information
label located on the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar)
below the vehicle’s door latch, using the air pressure
gage on the top of the unit as a guide.
The pressure gage reading is slightly high while the
compressor is on. Turn the compressor off to get
an accurate pressure reading.

10. Move the inflator kit switch to the O (off) position
once the correct tire pressure is obtained.
11. Turn off the engine.
12. Unplug the air compressor accessory plug from the
accessory power outlet in the vehicle.
13. Disconnect the sealant filling hose from the tire
valve stem, by turning it counterclockwise, and
replace the tire valve stem cap.
Be careful when handling the tire inflator
components as they may be hot after usage.
14. Wrap the sealant filling hose around the air
compressor channel to stow it in its original location.

Notice: If the recommended pressure cannot be
reached after 15 minutes, the vehicle should not be
driven farther. Damage to the tire is severe and
the sealant will not be effective. Remove the
air compressor plug from the accessory power
outlet and unscrew the inflating hose from the tire
valve. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 7-6.

5-83

15. Stow the air compressor accessory plug back in the
air compressor. To do this, wrap the air compressor
accessory plug, snap in the plug, and then push
in the bottom and then the top of the wrapped
air compressor accessory plug.
16. If the flat tire was able
to inflate to the
recommended inflation
pressure, remove the
maximum speed label
from the sealant
canister.

Place it in a highly visible location such as the
inside of the upper left corner of the windshield or
to the face of the radio/clock.
The maximum speed label reminds you to drive
cautiously and not to exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until
you have the damaged tire inspected and repaired.

5-84

{CAUTION:
Storing the tire inflator kit or other equipment in
the passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
the tire inflator kit in the proper place.

17. Return the equipment to the proper storage location
in the trunk of your vehicle.

18. Immediately drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) to
distribute the sealant evenly in the tire. Stop at a
safe location and check the tire pressure. Refer to
Steps 1 through 8 under “Using the Air Compressor
without Sealant” next in this section. If the tire
pressure has fallen more than 10 psi (68 kPa) below
the recommended inflation pressure, stop driving
the vehicle. The tire is too damaged for the sealant
to work. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 7-6.
If the tire pressure has not dropped more than
10 psi (68 kPa) from the recommended inflation
pressure, you can inflate the tire back up to
the recommended inflation pressure.

Using the Air Compressor
without Sealant
To use the air compressor by itself to inflate a tire, do
the following:
1. Remove the air compressor accessory plug from
the air compressor.

19. Dispose of the sealant canister at a local GM dealer
or in accordance with your local state codes and
practices.
After using the sealant canister, replace it with a
new canister from a GM dealer.
20. After temporarily repairing a tire with the emergency
flat tire repair kit, take your vehicle to an authorized
GM dealer to have the tire inspected and repaired.
2. Unlock the air compressor hose from the sealant
canister by pulling up on the lever.

5-85

3. Pull the air compressor inflator hose from the
sealant canister.
4. Push the air compressor inflator hose onto the
tire valve stem and push the lever down to
secure in place.
5. Plug the air compressor accessory plug into an
accessory power outlet in the vehicle. See
Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 3-24 for more
information.

{CAUTION:
Idling the engine in a closed-in place or with
the climate control system off can cause
deadly carbon monoxide (CO). See Engine
Exhaust on page 2-33.
6. Start the vehicle. See Starting the Engine on
page 2-23 for more information. The vehicle must be
running while using the air compressor.

{CAUTION:
Inflating something too much can make it
explode, and you or others could be injured.
Be sure to read the inflator instructions, and
inflate the tire to its recommended pressure.
Do not exceed 36 psi (248 kPa).
7. Move the inflator kit switch to the I (on) position.
8. Make sure there is a proper connection between the
tire valve stem and the air compressor hose by
looking at the air pressure gage. If there is not a
pressure reading while the compressor is running,
the connection between the inflator kit and the
tire is bad.
Check the attachment between the air compressor
hose and the tire valve stem.
9. Inflate the tire up to the recommended inflation
pressure using the air pressure gage on the top
of the unit as a guide.
10. Turn off the air compressor by moving the switch to
the O (off) position.

5-86

{CAUTION:

Removal and Installation of the
Sealant Canister
To remove the sealant canister, do the following:

Storing the tire inflator kit or other equipment
in the passenger compartment of the vehicle
could cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could strike
someone. Store the tire inflator kit in the
proper place.
11. Disconnect the compressor inflator hose and wrap
the hose in the bottom of the inflator kit.
12. Place the equipment in the original location in the
trunk of your vehicle.

1. Unlock the air compressor inflator hose from the
sealant canister by pulling the lever up.
2. Disconnect the air compressor inflator hose from
the sealant canister.
3. Unwrap the sealant filling hose from the
compressor.

5-87

To install a new sealant canister, do the following:
1. Align the sealant filling hose with the slot in the air
compressor.
2. Push the sealant canister down and rotate it
clockwise.
3. Wrap the sealant filling hose around the air
compressor channel to stow it in its original location.
4. Push the air compressor inflator hose onto the
sealant canister inlet and push the lever down.

Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your vehicle’s
hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers
on page 3-6 for more information.
4. Turn the sealant canister so the inflator filling hose
is aligned with the slot in the compressor.
5. Lift the sealant canister from the air compressor
and replace with a new sealant canister. See
your GM dealer for more information.

5-88

{CAUTION:

When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement of
wheel blocks.

Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in
the vehicle.
To be even more certain the vehicle will not
move, you should put blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire, on the
other side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.

The following information will tell you next how to use
the jack and change a tire.

5-89

Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The equipment needed to change a tire is located in
the trunk.
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-13 for more
information.
2. Remove the convenience net, if equipped, by
removing the net hook attachments.
3. Lift up the carpet.
4. Turn the center nut on
the compact spare tire
cover counterclockwise
to remove it.
7. Turn the nut holding the jack counterclockwise and
remove it. Then remove the jack and wrench.

5. Remove the cover.
6. Remove the compact spare tire. See Compact
Spare Tire on page 5-99 for more information.

5-90

Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
Your vehicle may have aluminum wheels. If so, you will
see exposed stainless steel wheel nuts. Use the
wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts. Do not
remove them yet.
Or, your vehicle may have steel wheel covers.

8. The tools you will be using include the jack (A),
extension and protector/guide (B) and the wheel
wrench (C).

To remove the steel wheel covers and wheel nut caps,
loosen the plastic nut caps with the wheel wrench in
a counterclockwise direction. If needed, you can finish
loosening them with your fingers. The plastic nut
caps will not come off.
5-91

Use the flat end of the wheel wrench and pry along the
edge of the cover until it comes off. The edge of the
wheel cover could be sharp, so do not try to remove it
with your bare hands. Do not drop the cover or lay
it face down, as it could become scratched or damaged.
Once you have removed the wheel cover, use the
following procedure to remove the flat tire and install the
spare tire.
1. Turn the wheel wrench
once on each wheel nut
to loosen them. Do not
remove them yet.

2. Find the jacking location using the diagram. For
jacking at the vehicle’s front location, put the jack
lift head (C) about 6 inches (15 cm) from the
rear edge of the front wheel opening (B). Line up
the jack with the arrow (A) as shown.

5-92

{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.

{CAUTION:

For jacking at the vehicle’s rear location, put the
jack lift head (B) about 9 inches (23 cm) from
the front edge of the rear wheel opening (C). Line
up the jack with the arrow (A) as shown.

Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.

3. Put the compact spare tire near you.

5-93

{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground for the compact spare tire to fit underneath
the wheel well of the vehicle.
5. Remove all wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.

5-94

7. Install the compact spare tire.

{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
the places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get
all the rust or dirt off.

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If
you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel
could fall off, causing a serious accident.
8. Reinstall the wheel nuts
with the rounded end of
the nuts toward the
wheel. Tighten each nut
by hand until the wheel
is held against the hub.

6. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.

5-95

{CAUTION:

9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose
and even come off. This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel
nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to
get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities
and Specifications on page 5-118 for wheel nut
torque specification.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-118 for the wheel nut
torque specification.

5-96

10. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools

{CAUTION:

Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your compact
spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on the compact
spare, you could damage the cover or the spare.
Do not try to put the wheel cover on the compact spare
tire. It will not fit. Store the wheel cover in the trunk
until the flat tire is repaired or replaced.

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
all these in the proper place.
After the compact spare tire is put on the vehicle, store
the flat tire in the trunk. Use the following procedure
to secure it in the trunk. When storing a full-size tire, use
the extension and protector/guide, located in the foam
holder to help avoid wheel surface damage.

5-97

To store a full-size tire, do the following:
1. Install the tools in their original location in the trunk
area and secure.
2. Place the tire in the trunk with the valve stem facing
down, and the protector/guide placed through a
wheel bolt hole.
3. Remove the protector and attach the
retainer securely.
4. Place the protector/guide back in the foam holder
when putting the compact spare back in the trunk.
Store the cover as far forward as possible.
The compact spare tire is for temporary use only.
Replace the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as
soon as possible. See Compact Spare Tire on
page 5-99 for more information. Use the following as a
guide for storing the compact spare tire and tools.

5-98

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.

Retainer
Cover
Compact Spare Tire
Nut
Jack
Wheel Wrench
Extension and
Protective Guide
H. Foam Holder
I. Bolt Screw

Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when
the vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle, stop
as soon as possible and make sure the spare tire
is correctly inflated. The compact spare is made to
perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h)
for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can
finish your trip and have the full-size tire repaired or
replaced at your convenience. Of course, it is best
to replace the spare with a full-size tire as soon as
possible. The spare tire will last longer and be in good
shape in case it is needed again.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
with guide rails. The compact spare can get
caught on the rails. That can damage the tire and
wheel, and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.
And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the
spare tire and its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact spare.
Using them can damage your vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Do not use tire chains on
your compact spare.

Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if
it is cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and
dirt can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt can
damage carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces.
Regular vacuuming is recommended to remove particles
from your upholstery. It is important to keep your
upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled.
Soils should be removed as quickly as possible. Your
vehicle’s interior may experience extremes of heat
that could cause stains to set rapidly.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to your home furnishings may also
transfer color to your vehicle’s interior.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.

5-99

Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the integrated
radio antenna and the rear window defogger. When
cleaning the glass on your vehicle, use only a
soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’s
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening
your vehicle’s doors and windows.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
Your GM dealer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you can
also obtain a product from your GM dealer to remove
odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.

Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleaners
or techniques:

• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
remove a soil from any interior surface.

• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage to
your vehicle’s interior surfaces.

• Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively
with a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure
can damage your interior and does not improve the
effectiveness of soil removal.

• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundry
detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers.
Using too much soap will leave a residue that
leaves streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners,
about 20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a
good guide.

• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery
while cleaning.

• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result from
the use of many organic solvents such as naptha,
alcohol, etc.

5-100

Fabric/Carpet

Most stains can be removed with club soda water. To
clean, use the following instructions:

Cleaning Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic, and painted surfaces
with a clean, damp cloth.
Your GM dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabric
and carpet. They will clean normal spots and stains
very well.
®

If the vehicle has the Ultra Lux suede fabric, follow the
listed procedures except do not use any solvents or
dry cleaning products.
Here are some cleaning tips:

• Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
• Clean up stains as soon as you can, before
they set.

1. For liquids: blot with a clean, soft white cloth.
For solids: remove as much as possible and
then vacuum or brush.
2. Apply club soda water to a clean, soft white
cloth. Do not over-saturate; the cloth should not
drip water.
3. Clean the entire area. Avoid getting the fabric
too wet.
4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain to
avoid a ring effect.
5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the cloth
each time it becomes soiled.
6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleaned area
with another dry clean, soft white cloth.

• Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
• Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a
clean area often. A soft brush may be used if stains
are stubborn.

• To avoid forming a ring on fabric after spot cleaning,
clean the entire area immediately or it will set.

5-101

Using Cleaner on Fabric
1. First, try the cleaner in an inconspicuous area to
make sure the cleaner does not affect the color of
the fabric.
2. For liquids: blot the stain with a clean, soft
white cloth.
For solids: remove as much as possible and then
vacuum or brush.
3. Spray a small amount of the cleaner onto a
clean, soft white cloth. Do not apply spray directly to
the fabric.
4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain to
avoid a ring effect.
5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the cloth
each time it becomes soiled.
6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleaned area
with another dry clean, soft white cloth.
7. If the cleaner leaves a ring effect, follow up with
the club soda water instructions given earlier in
this section.

5-102

Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee, tea,
milk, fruit, fruit juice, jelly, cheese, chocolate, vomit,
urine, and blood can be removed using the club soda
water instructions given earlier in this section. If an odor
lingers after cleaning vomit or urine, treat the area
with a water and baking soda solution: 1 teaspoon
(5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml) of lukewarm
water. Let dry.
Stains caused by oil and grease can be cleaned with an
approved GM cleaner and a clean, white cloth.
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. Clean with cool water and allow to dry completely.
3. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions
described earlier.

Leather

Ultra Lux Suede

A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can
be used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use
heat to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never
use spot lifters or spot removers on leather. Many
commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold
to preserve and protect leather may permanently
change the appearance and feel of your leather and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
your vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on your leather.

Cleaning Ultra Lux Suede
Use a mild solution of lukewarm water and a neutral
dish soap on a soft cloth or sponge. For the following
stains, follow these instructions:
Coffee, Tea, and Milk: Blot with a clean, soft, white
cloth. Then clean with mild soapy water and a clean
white cloth.
Cosmetics: Clean with mild soapy water and a clean
white cloth.
Jelly, Syrup, and Fruit: Remove most of the solids,
then clean with warm tap water and a clean white cloth.
Oil and Grease: Sprinkle baking soda on the spot,
brush, then wipe with a clean white cloth.

5-103

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use
spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many
commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to
preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may
permanently change the appearance and feel of your
interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone
or wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in
a non-uniform manner.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on your
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.

5-104

Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.

Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required. See
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.

Washing Your Vehicle

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses

The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty, depth of
color, gloss retention, and durability.

Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on
page 5-105.

The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to
keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or
cold water.
Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. GM-approved
cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer. See
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-109.
Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the
surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft,
clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface
scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
the vehicle.

Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from
the paint finish. GM-approved cleaning products can be
obtained from your dealer. See Vehicle
Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-109.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
The vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish.
The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.

5-105

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather,
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. To help keep the paint finish looking
new, keep the vehicle in a garage or covered whenever
possible.

Windshield and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap, or other material may be on the blade
or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a glass
cleaning liquid or powder and water solution. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form when it is rinsed
with water.

5-106

Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by
wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.

Aluminum Wheels
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels, you could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Use only GM-approved cleaners on
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.

Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because the surface could be damaged. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Do not take the vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.

Tires
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.

Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.

Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may develop into major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with
touch-up materials available from your GM dealer.
Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your
GM dealer’s body and paint shop.
5-107

Underbody Maintenance

Chemical Paint Spotting

Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.

Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the
paint surface.

At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.

5-108

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Tar and Road
Oil Remover
Chrome Cleaner
and Polish
White Sidewall
Tire Cleaner
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
Chrome and Wire
Wheel Cleaner
Finish Enhancer

Usage
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Cleans vinyl.
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
and wipe off.

Description
Swirl Remover Polish
Cleaner Wax
Foaming Tire Shine
Low Gloss

Wash Wax Concentrate

Spot Lifter

Odor Eliminator

Usage
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Cleans, shines, and
protects in one step. No
wiping necessary.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Quickly removes spots
and stains from carpets,
vinyl, and cloth
upholstery.
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.

5-109

Vehicle Identification

Engine Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This
code will help you identify your vehicle’s engine,
specifications, and replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification Label
You will find this label in the trunk. It is very helpful if you
ever need to order parts. On this label, you will find
the following:

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.

5-110

•
•
•
•

VIN
Model designation
Paint information
Production options and special equipment

Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.

Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and
the damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other
components from working as they should.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-65.

Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If
the overload is caused by some electrical problem, have
it fixed.

Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers in the fuse panel protect the power
windows and other power accessories. When the current
load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and
closes, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed.

Headlamp Wiring
The headlamp circuit is protected by individual fuses in
the underhood fuse block. An electrical overload will
cause the fuse to blow. If this happens, have the
headlamp system checked right away.

5-111

Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links in the wiring itself. This
greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by electrical
problems.

Instrument Panel Fuse Block
Some fuses are in a fuse
block located on the end
of the instrument panel on
the passenger side.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure to
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating. Spare fuses and a fuse puller are
located in the underhood fuse block. See Underhood
Fuse Block later in this section.

To get to the fuse block lift up on the side panel. A fuse
usage chart is on the inside of this panel.

5-112

Fuse
CANISTER
PK LAMPS
RADIO/AMP

Fuse
RAP
SUN ROOF
CRUISE SW
PK LP
RR DEFOG
DR LK/TRUNK
ONSTAR/ALDL

Usage
Retained Accessory Power
Sunroof
Cruise Switch
Parking Lamps
Rear Window Defogger
Door Lock/Trunk
Onstar®/Diagnostic Link

Usage
Fuel Tank Solenoid Canister
Parking Lamps
Radio Amplifier
Remote Function Activator (Remote
RFA/MOD
Keyless Entry)
Instrument Panel Displays/Head-Up
DISPLAYS
Display (HUD), Driver Information
Center (DIC)
INT LIGHT
Interior Lamps
HVAC
Climate Controls
High Mounted Stop
CHMSL/BKUP Center
Lamp/Back-Up Lamps
PWR WDO
Power Windows
SPRING
Steering Wheel Control Switches
COIL 2
PWR SEAT Power Seat
Turn Signals/Hazard
TURN/HAZ
Warning Lamps
PWR MIRS
Power Mirrors
HTD SEAT
Heated Seat
To reinstall the end panel, position the lower section
with the edge of the instrument panel, and press
the sides of the panel until it snaps into place.

5-113

Underhood Fuse Block
The underhood fuse block
is located on the
passenger’s side of the
vehicle in the engine
compartment.

To remove the fuse block cover, press in on the tab at
the bottom of the cover and pull up.

5-114

V6 Engine
Fuses
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11

Usage
Driver’s Side High-Beam Headlamp
Passenger’s Side High-Beam Headlamp
Driver’s Side Low-Beam Headlamp
Passenger’s Side Low-Beam Headlamp
Windshield Wipers/Washer
Washer/Remote Vehicle Current
Fog Lamps (Option)
Airbag
Accessory Power
Horn

Fuses
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
56

Usage
Emission
Air Conditioning Clutch
Oxygen Sensor
Powertrain Control Module
Powertrain Control Module/Electronic
Throttle Control
Electronic Throttle Control
Display
Anti-lock Brake Solenoid
Fuel Injection
Transmission Solenoid
Fuel Pump
Anti-lock Brakes
Electronic Ignition
Battery Main 1
Battery Main 2
Battery Main 3
Fan 1
Battery Main 4
Anti-lock Brake Motor
Fan 2
Starter
Air Pump

Relays
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55

§

Usage
High-Beam Headlamps
Low-Beam Headlamps
Fog Lamps (Option)
Ignition 1
Air Conditioner Compressor
Horn
Powertrain
Fuel Pump
Fan 1
Fan 3
Windshield Wiper/High
Windshield Wiper
Fan 2
Crank
Spare Fuse
Spare Fuse
Spare Fuse
Blank
Blank
Blank
Fuse Puller
Air Conditioning Clutch

5-115

Fuses
A/C CMPRSR
INJ 1
BCM/TCM
TRANS
EMISSIONS1

Fuses
HVAC
FUEL/PUMP
AIRBAG/
DISPLAY
COMPASS
ABS
ETC/ECM

5-116

Climate Control System

Electronic Throttle Control, Engine
Control Module

Transaxle
Emissions 1

Body Control Module, Ignition

WPR

Injectors 2
Emissions 2
Windshield Wipers

AUX PWR

Auxiliary Power

WSW/RVC

Windshield Washer, Regulated
Voltage Control

Airbag, Display

Anti-lock Brake System

Body Control Module, Transmission
Control Module

BCM IGN

Fuel Pump

Compass

Injectors 1

Anti-lock Brake Solenoid

EMISSIONS2
Usage

Air Conditioning Compressor

ABS SOL

INJ 2
V8 Engine

Usage

LT LO BEAM

Driver’s Side Low Beam

RT LO BEAM

Passenger’s Side Low Beam

FOG LAMPS

Fog Lamps (Option)

LT HI BEAM

Driver’s Side High Beam

Fuses
HORN
RT HI BEAM

Usage
Horn

Relays
STRTR

Passenger’s Side High Beam

PWR/TRN

Usage
Starter
Powertrain

SPARE

Spare

STRTR

SPARE

Spare

ABS MTR

SPARE

Spare

BATT 3

Battery 3

SPARE

Spare

BATT 2

Battery 2

FAN 2

Cooling Fan 2

Relays
BATT 4
FUEL/PUMP
BATT 1
A/C CMPRSR

Usage

Starter
Anti-lock Brake System Motor

FAN 3

Cooling Fan 3

Battery 4

FAN 2

Cooling Fan 2

Fuel Pump

FAN 1

Cooling Fan 1

Battery 1

FAN 1

Cooling Fan 1

Air Conditioning Compressor

5-117

Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-12 for more information.

Capacities and Specifications
Application

Capacities
English

Metric

7.4 qt

7.0 L

3800 V6 Engine

11.2 qt

10.6 L

3800 V6 Supercharged Engine

11.2 qt

10.6 L

5.3L V8 Engine

13.0 qt

12.3 L

3800 V6 Engine

4.5 qt

4.3 L

3800 V6 Supercharged Engine

4.5 qt

4.3 L

Automatic Transaxle
Cooling System Including Reservoir

Engine Oil with Filter

6 qt

5.7 L

Fuel Tank

5.3L V8 Engine

17.5 gal

66.3 L

Wheel Nut Torque

100 ft lb

140 Y

All capacities are approximate. When adding fluid, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

5-118

Engine Specifications
Engine

VIN Code

Transaxle

Spark Plug Gap

3800 V6
(3.8L L26)

2

Automatic

.060 inches (1.52 mm)

3800 V6 Supercharged
(3.8L L32)

4

Automatic

.060 inches (1.52 mm)

5.3L V8 Engine

C

Automatic

.040 inches (1.01 mm)

5-119

✍ NOTES

5-120

Section 6

Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2
Introduction ...................................................6-2
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2
Using the Maintenance Schedule ......................6-2
Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4
Additional Required Services ............................6-6
Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-7

Owner Checks and Services ............................6-8
At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-9
At Least Once a Month ...................................6-9
At Least Once a Year ...................................6-10
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-12
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..........6-13
Maintenance Record .....................................6-14

6-1

Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.

Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of
emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.

Using the Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance Requirements

We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we do not know
exactly how you will drive it. You may drive very
short distances only a few times a week. Or you may
drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty
weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.
Or you may drive it to work, to do errands, or in many
other ways.

Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary
to keep your vehicle in good working condition. Any
damage caused by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance may not be covered by warranty.

Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your GM Goodwrench® dealer.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.

6-2

This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the tire and
loading information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-33.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.

• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 5-5.
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
Required Services on page 6-6 and Maintenance
Footnotes on page 6-7 for further information.

{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you
can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
see your GM Goodwrench® dealer to have a
qualified technician do the work.

Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
unless you are technically qualified and have the
necessary equipment, you should have your
GM Goodwrench® dealer do these jobs.
When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer for your
service needs, you will know that GM-trained and
supported service technicians will perform the work
using genuine GM parts.
If you want to purchase service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-14.
Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 tells you what
should be checked, when to check it, and what you
can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good
condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-12 and Normal Maintenance Replacement
Parts on page 6-13. When your vehicle is serviced,
make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced
and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone
else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
genuine GM parts.

6-3

Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes on, it
means that service is required for your vehicle. See
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-72. Have your
vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next
600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are
driving under the best conditions, the engine oil life
system may not indicate that vehicle service is
necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil
and filter must be changed at least once a year and
at this time the system must be reset. Your
GM Goodwrench® dealer has GM-trained service
technicians who will perform this work using genuine
GM parts and reset the system.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to reset
the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See
Engine Oil Life System on page 5-19 for information on
the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.

6-4

When the CHANGE OIL SOON message appears,
certain services, checks, and inspections are required.
Required services are described in the following for
“Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally,
it is recommended that your first service be
Maintenance I, your second service be Maintenance II,
and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II
may be required more often.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the CHANGE
OIL SOON message comes on within 10 months
since the vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II
was performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the message comes on
10 months or more since the last service or if the
message has not come on at all for one year.

Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-16. Reset oil
life system. See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-19. An Emission
•
Control Service.
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (k).
•
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-21. See footnote (m).
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 5-70 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month on
•
page 6-9.
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid
•
as needed.
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in
•
this section.
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
Check transaxle fluid level and add fluid as needed.
Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (g).
Inspect throttle system. See footnote (j).

Maintenance II
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

6-5

Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles
(kilometers) shown for each item.

Additional Required Services
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-21.
Supercharger service, if equipped.
An Emission Control Service. See
footnotes † and (l).
Change automatic transaxle fluid and
filter (severe service). See footnote (h).
Change automatic transaxle fluid and
filter (normal service).
Replace spark plugs and inspect spark
plug wires. An Emission Control Service.
Engine cooling system service
(or every five years, whichever occurs
first). An Emission Control Service. See
footnote (i).
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service. See
footnote (n).
6-6

25,000
(41 500)
•

50,000
(83 000)
•

75,000
(125 000)
•

100,000
(166 000)
•

125,000
(207 500)
•

150,000
(240 000)
•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•
•

•
•

•
•

•
•

•
•

•
•

•
•
•

•

Maintenance Footnotes
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts or
signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines and hoses
for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if
they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect
all pipes, fittings, and clamps; replace with genuine
GM parts as needed. To help ensure proper operation,
a pressure test of the cooling system and pressure
cap and cleaning the outside of the radiator and
air conditioning condenser is recommended at least
once a year.

(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking.
Replace wiper blades that appear worn or damaged
or that streak or miss areas of the windshield.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts
replaced. Also look for any opened or broken airbag
coverings, and have them repaired or replaced.
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders. Lubricate all
hinges and latches, including those for the body doors,
hood, secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor, release
pawl, rear compartment, glove box door, console door,
and any folding seat hardware. More frequent
lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive
environment. Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips
with a clean cloth will make them last longer, seal
better, and not stick or squeak.
(g) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, the
filter may require replacement more often.

6-7

(h) Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if
the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
service.

(l) For supercharged engines only: Have your dealer
check the supercharger oil level and add the proper
supercharger oil as needed (or every 36 months,
whichever occurs first). See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 6-12.

(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer perform
this service. See Engine Coolant on page 5-25 for
what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,
pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure test the
cooling system and pressure cap.

Owner Checks and Services

(j) Check throttle system for interference or binding and
for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as
needed. Replace any components that have high effort
or excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator or
cruise control cables.
(k) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired
and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.

6-8

(m) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
(n) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.

These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability, and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your GM Goodwrench® dealer can assist you
with these checks and services.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.

At Each Fuel Fill

At Least Once a Month

It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.

Tire Inflation Check

Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil
if necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-16 for
further details.
Notice: It is important to check your oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep your
engine oil at the proper level can cause damage
to your engine not covered by your warranty.

Engine Coolant Level Check

Visually inspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure they
are inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to
check the spare tire. See Tires on page 5-60 for further
details. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
securely. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-88.

Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway
drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service
notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,
rotate the tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-70.

Check the engine coolant level and add
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-25 for further details.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if
necessary.

6-9

At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.

Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control
System Check

{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-30.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-30.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.

3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If
the vehicle starts in any other position, contact your
GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.

3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN, but do
not start the engine. Without applying the regular
brake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P)
with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out
of PARK (P), contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer
for service.

6-10

Ignition Transaxle Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to OFF in each shift lever position.

• The ignition should turn to OFF only when the shift
lever is in PARK (P).

• The key should come out only in OFF.
Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service is
required.

Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle
Park (P) Mechanism Check

{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL (N),
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular
brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the
parking brake only.

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).
Then release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service is
required.

Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.

6-11

Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification may be obtained from
your dealer.
Usage

Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets GM
Standard GM6094M and displays
the American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. GM Goodwrench®
Engine Oil
oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
engine, see Engine Oil on
page 5-16.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
Engine Coolant Coolant.
See Engine Coolant on
page 5-25.
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Windshield
GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Washer

6-12

Usage

Fluid/Lubricant
GM
Power
Steering Fluid
Power Steering (GM Part No.
U.S. 89021184, in
System
Canada 89021186).
Automatic
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transaxle
Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Key Lock
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Cylinders
Canada 10953474).
Supercharger Oil
Part No. U.S. 12345982,
Supercharger (GM
in Canada 10953513). See
Supercharger Oil on page 5-20.
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
Secondary
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in
Latch, Pivots, Canada 992723) or lubricant
Spring
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Anchor, and
Category LB or GC-LB.
Release Pawl
Lubricant, Superlube
Hood and Door Multi-Purpose
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Hinges
Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning

Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, in
Canada 992887).

Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your GM dealer.

Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
GM Part Number

ACDelco® Part
Number

3800 V6 Engine

15221217

—

5.3L V8 Engine

10350737

—

3800 V6 Engine

25010792

PF-47

5.3L V8 Engine

88984215

PF-46

15284938

CF132

3800 V6 Engine

12568387

41-101

5.3L V8 Engine

12571164

41-985

Driver Side

15146562

—

Passenger Side

15146563

—

Part
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

Engine Oil Filter

Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Spark Plugs

Windshield Wiper Blades
19.7 inches (55.0 cm)

6-13

Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record
Date

6-14

Odometer
Reading

Serviced By

Maintenance I or
Maintenance II

Services Performed

Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date

Odometer
Reading

Serviced By

Maintenance I or
Maintenance II

Services Performed

6-15

Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date

6-16

Odometer
Reading

Serviced By

Maintenance I or
Maintenance II

Services Performed

Section 7

Customer Assistance and Information

Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2
Online Owner Center ......................................7-3
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users ...............................................7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-4
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................7-5
Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-6
Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-7
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders ..................................................7-9
Collision Damage Repair ................................7-10

Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-13
Reporting Safety Defects to the United
States Government ....................................7-13
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ..............................................7-14
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .....7-14
Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-14

7-1

Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Pontiac. Normally, any concerns with
the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle
will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Pontiac Customer Assistance Center by calling
1-800-762-2737. In Canada, contact GM of Canada
Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
7-2

We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title, or the
plate at the top left of the instrument panel and
visible through the windshield.

• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting Pontiac, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That
is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the
BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for
information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to
filing a court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in
your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other
venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.

Online Owner Center
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in
one place.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:

• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner’s manual (United States only).

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.

• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members (United States only).
Refer to the web for updated information.
To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com
(United States) or My GM Canada within
www.gmcanada.com (Canada).

7-3

Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Pontiac has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate
with Pontiac by dialing: 1-800-833-PONT (7668).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Customer Assistance Offices
Pontiac encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes
to write or e-mail Pontiac, refer to the addresses below.

United States — Customer Assistance
Pontiac Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
www.Pontiac.com
1-800-762-2737 or
1-800-833-7668 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-ROADSIDE (762-3743)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022

7-4

From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022

Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

Overseas — Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.

GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program

Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) — Customer Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma #2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users call
1-800-263-3830.

7-5

Roadside Assistance Program
As the owner of a new Pontiac vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Pontiac Roadside
Assistance program. This value-added service is
intended to provide you with peace of mind as you drive
in the city or travel the open road. Contact Pontiac’s
Roadside Assistance toll-free at 1-800-ROADSIDE
(762-3743). Roadside Assistance Representatives are
available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
We will provide the following services during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period, at no expense
to you:

• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
($5 maximum) for the customer to get to the
nearest service station.

• Lock-out Service (identification required):
Replacement keys or locksmith service will
be covered at no charge if you are unable to gain
entry into your vehicle. Delivery of the replacement
key will be covered within 10 miles (16 km).

• Emergency Tow: Tow to the nearest dealership for
warranty service or in the event of a
vehicle-disabling accident. Assistance provided
when the vehicle is mired in sand, mud, or snow.

• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire will be
covered at no charge. The customer is responsible
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not
covered by a warrantable failure.

• Jump Start: No-start occurrences which require a
battery jump start will be covered at no charge.

• Dealer Locator Service
In many instances, mechanical failures are covered
under Pontiac’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty. However,
when other services are utilized, our Roadside
Assistance Representatives will explain any payment
obligations you might incur.
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,
please provide the following to the Roadside
Assistance Representative:

• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number.

• Telephone number of your location.
• Location of the vehicle.
• Model, year, color, and license plate number of the
vehicle.

• Mileage, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), and
delivery date of the vehicle.

• Description of the problem.
7-6

While we hope you never have the occasion to use our
service, it is added security while traveling for you
and your family. Remember, we are only a phone call
away. Pontiac Roadside Assistance: 1-800-ROADSIDE
(762-3743), text telephone (TTY) users, call
1-888-889-2438.

Courtesy Transportation

Pontiac reserves the right to limit services or
reimbursement to an owner or driver when, in Pontiac’s
judgement, the claims become excessive in frequency
or type of occurrence.

The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to
customers in conjunction with the Bumper-to-Bumper
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Several transportation options are available when
warranty repairs are required. This will reduce your
inconvenience during warranty repairs.

Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Pontiac reserves the right to make any changes or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any
time without notification.

Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
roadside assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book.

To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for
new vehicles.

Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you should
contact your dealer and request an appointment. By
scheduling a service appointment and advising
your service consultant of your transportation needs,
your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, let
them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle off
for service, you are urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for the same day repair.

7-7

Transportation Options

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:

Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty
repair. Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum
amount per day and must be supported by receipts. This
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state, local and rental vehicle provider
requirements. Requirements vary and may include
minimum age requirements, insurance coverage, credit
card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage charges
and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,
usage fees, excessive mileage or rental usage beyond
the completion of the repair.

Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes
one-way or round trip shuttle service to a destination up
to 10 miles (16 km) from the dealership.

Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement

Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.

If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement of public transportation expenses may
be available, for up to a maximum of five days. In
addition, should you arrange transportation through a
friend or relative, reimbursement for reasonable
fuel expenses may be available, up to a five-day
maximum. Claim amounts should reflect actual costs
and be supported by original receipts.

Additional Program Information

7-8

Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it is
not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A
separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage information.

Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating
dealers and all program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at every dealer. Please
contact your dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during
the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult
your dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.

Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders

Some information may be stored during regular
operations to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions;
other information is stored only in a crash event by
computer systems, such as those commonly called event
data recorders (EDR).
In a crash event, computer systems, such as the Airbag
Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in your vehicle
may record information about the condition of the vehicle
and how it was operated, such as data related to
engine speed, brake application, throttle position, vehicle
speed, safety belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag
performance, and the severity of a collision. If your
vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak®, steering
performance, including yaw rate, steering wheel angle,
and lateral acceleration, is also recorded. This
information has been used to improve vehicle crash
performance and may be used to improve crash
performance of future vehicles and driving safety. Unlike
the data recorders on many airplanes, these on-board
systems do not record sounds, such as conversation of
vehicle occupants.

Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has a
number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor
and control several aspects of the vehicle’s performance.
Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle computers to monitor
emission control components to optimize fuel economy,
to monitor conditions for airbag deployment and, if so
equipped, to provide anti-lock braking and to help the
driver control the vehicle in difficult driving situations.
7-9

To read this information, special equipment is needed
and access to the vehicle or the device that stores
the data is required. GM will not access information
about a crash event or share it with others other than:
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,
• in response to an official request of police or similar
government office,
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the
discovery process, or
• as required by law.
In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may:
• use the data for GM research needs,
• make it available for research where appropriate
confidentiality is to be maintained and need is
shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a specific
vehicle with non-GM organizations for research
purposes.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have access to
the special equipment that can read the information
if they have access to the vehicle or the device
that stores the data.
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, please check
the OnStar® subscription service agreement or manual
for information on its operations and data collection.

7-10

Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs
will diminish your vehicle’s resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised in subsequent
collisions.

Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the
same materials and construction methods as the parts
with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine
GM Collision parts are your best choice to assure that
your vehicle’s designed appearance, durability and safety
are preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior accidents. In most
cases, the parts being recycled are from undamaged
sections of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment
GM part, may be an acceptable choice to maintain your
vehicle’s originally designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of these parts is not
known. Such parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related failures
are not covered by that warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not
have been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these
parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/
corrosion problems, and may not perform properly in
subsequent collisions. Aftermarket parts are not covered
by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any
vehicle failure related to such parts are not covered by
that warranty.

Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your GM dealer may have a collision
repair center with GM-trained technicians and state
of the art equipment, or be able to recommend a
collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.

Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There
are significant differences in the quality of coverage
afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many
insurance policies provide reduced protection to your
GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs
by using aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance
companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that
you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM
original equipment collision parts. If such insurance
coverage is not available from your current insurance
carrier, consider switching to another insurance carrier.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read
your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the
end of your lease for poor quality repairs.

7-11

If an Accident Occurs
Here is what to do if you are involved in an accident.

• Try to relax and then check to make sure you are all
right. If you are uninjured, make sure that no one else
in your vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.

• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help. Do not
leave the scene of an accident until all matters have
been taken care of. Move your vehicle only if its
position puts you in danger or you are instructed to
move it by a police officer.

• Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the accident.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental frame
of mind, or anything unrelated to the accident. This
will help guard against post-accident legal action.

• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 7-6 for more information.

• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the
tow truck operator or write down the driver’s name,
the service’s name, and the phone number.

• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these items
in your vehicle.
7-12

• Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company and
policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.

• If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the accident. They will walk you through the
information they will need. If they ask for a police
report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of
the report for a nominal fee. In some states with “no
fault” insurance laws, a report may not be necessary.
This is especially true if there are no injuries and both
vehicles are driveable.

• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for
your vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealer or a
private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable with
their work for a long time.

• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.

Managing the Vehicle Damage
Repair Process

Reporting Safety Defects

In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your
GM vehicle warranty.

Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government

Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live
with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your
insurance company may initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts.
Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be
obligated to have the vehicle repaired with
Genuine GM parts, even if your insurance coverage
does not pay the full cost.
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with
that company. In such cases, you can have control of
the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.

7-13

Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government

Service Publications Ordering
Information

If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may call them at
1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Transport Canada
Place de Ville Tower C
330 Sparks Street
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5

Service Manuals

Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us.
Please call us at 1-800-762-2737, or write:
Pontiac Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
7-14

Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
This manual provides information on unit repair
service procedures, adjustments, and specifications for
GM transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.

Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service
Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General
Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483).

Owner’s Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include
the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207

Current and Past Model Order Forms

Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.

Service Publications are available for current and
past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.

7-15

✍ NOTES

7-16

A
Accessories and Modifications ............................ 5-3
Accessory Power Outlet(s) ............................... 3-24
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................... 1-66
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6
Add-On Electrical Equipment ........................... 5-111
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-21
Air Conditioning ...................................... 3-26, 3-29
Airbag
Passenger Status Indicator ........................... 3-40
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-39
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) ...... 7-9
Airbag System ................................................ 1-52
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ................................................... 1-66
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-59
Passenger Sensing System ........................... 1-61
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-65
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-59
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .... 1-60
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-57
Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-55
Antenna, Backglass ....................................... 3-141
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio
Antenna System ........................................ 3-142
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................... 4-7
Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .............. 3-44

Appearance Care
Aluminum Wheels ...................................... 5-106
Care of Safety Belts ................................... 5-104
Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 5-108
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................. 5-105
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle ................ 5-99
Fabric/Carpet ............................................ 5-101
Finish Care ............................................... 5-105
Finish Damage .......................................... 5-107
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces ..................................... 5-104
Leather .................................................... 5-103
Sheet Metal Damage .................................. 5-107
Tires ........................................................ 5-107
Ultra Lux Suede ........................................ 5-103
Underbody Maintenance ............................. 5-108
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............... 5-109
Washing Your Vehicle ................................. 5-105
Weatherstrips ............................................ 5-104
Windshield and Wiper Blades ...................... 5-106
Ashtray(s) ...................................................... 3-25
Assist Handles ............................................... 2-42
Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-94
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................... 3-139
Backglass Antenna ..................................... 3-141
Care of Your CD Player .............................. 3-141
Care of Your CDs ...................................... 3-141
Chime Level Adjustment ............................. 3-142

1

Audio System(s) (cont.)
Navigation/Radio System, see
Navigation Manual .................................. 3-139
Radio with CD ................................... 3-96, 3-107
Radio with Six-Disc CD .............................. 3-123
Setting the Time .......................................... 3-96
Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................... 3-139
Understanding Radio Reception ................... 3-140
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ........... 3-142
Automatic Transaxle
Fluid .......................................................... 5-23
Operation ................................................... 2-25

B
Backglass Antenna ........................................ 3-141
Battery .......................................................... 5-45
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ...................... 3-17
Run-Down Protection ................................... 3-20
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... 4-24
Brake
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................ 4-7
Emergencies ................................................ 4-8
Parking ...................................................... 2-30
System Warning Light .................................. 3-42
Brakes .......................................................... 5-42
Braking ........................................................... 4-6
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-8
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-21
2

Bulb Replacement ...........................................
Back-Up Lamps ...........................................
Front Turn Signal, Parking and Fog Lamps .....
Halogen Bulbs ............................................
Headlamp Aiming ........................................
Replacement Bulbs ......................................
Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ............
Buying New Tires ...........................................

5-53
5-58
5-56
5-53
5-50
5-59
5-57
5-72

C
California Fuel .................................................. 5-6
California Proposition 65 Warning ....................... 5-3
Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-118
Carbon Monoxide ................... 2-13, 2-33, 4-28, 4-40
Care of
Safety Belts .............................................. 5-104
Your CD Player ......................................... 3-141
Your CDs ................................................. 3-141
Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-42
Chains, Tire ................................................... 5-77
Check
Engine Light ............................................... 3-47
Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................. 5-108
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-36
Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-33

Child Restraints (cont.)
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children .......... 1-41
Older Children ............................................. 1-30
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position ........................................... 1-46
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position ................................... 1-48
Where to Put the Restraint ........................... 1-40
Chime Level Adjustment ................................. 3-142
Cigarette Lighter ............................................. 3-25
Cleaning
Aluminum Wheels ...................................... 5-106
Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................................ 5-105
Fabric/Carpet ............................................ 5-101
Finish Care ............................................... 5-105
Inside of Your Vehicle .................................. 5-99
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces ..................................... 5-104
Leather .................................................... 5-103
Tires ........................................................ 5-107
Ultra Lux Suede ........................................ 5-103
Underbody Maintenance ............................. 5-108
Washing Your Vehicle ................................. 5-105
Weatherstrips ............................................ 5-104
Windshield and Wiper Blades ...................... 5-106
Climate Control System ................................... 3-26
Air Filter, Passenger Compartment ................. 3-33
Dual Automatic ............................................ 3-29
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-33

Collision Damage Repair .................................. 7-10
Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ..................... 1-26
Compact Spare Tire ........................................ 5-99
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................... 2-17
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-5
Convenience Net ............................................ 2-43
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-46
Engine Temperature Warning Light ................. 3-46
Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-24
Cooling System .............................................. 5-30
Courtesy Lamps ............................................. 3-18
Cruise Control ................................................ 3-11
Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-51
Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-41
Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-7
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users ............................... 7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-4
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ............... 7-5
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .... 7-14
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government .............................. 7-14
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ......................... 7-13
Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-6
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-14

3

D
Daytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-16
Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2
Delayed Entry Lighting ..................................... 3-19
Delayed Exit Lighting ....................................... 3-19
Delayed Locking ............................................. 2-11
Displacement on Demand™ (DoD™) ................. 2-25
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4
Door
Delayed Locking .......................................... 2-11
Locks ........................................................ 2-10
Power Door Locks ....................................... 2-11
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-12
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-12
Driver
Position, Safety Belt ..................................... 1-16
Six-Way Power Seat ...................................... 1-2
Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-52
DIC Controls and Displays .................... 3-52, 3-60
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-72
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 4-19
City ........................................................... 4-22
Defensive ..................................................... 4-2
Drunken ....................................................... 4-3
Freeway ..................................................... 4-23
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-26
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-20

4

Driving (cont.)
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-33
Winter ........................................................ 4-28
Dual Automatic Climate Control System ............. 3-29

E
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment ..................................... 5-111
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-112
Headlamp Wiring ....................................... 5-111
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ....................... 5-112
Power Windows and Other Power Options .... 5-111
Underhood Fuse Block ............................... 5-114
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................. 5-111
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-21
Battery ....................................................... 5-45
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-47
Coolant ...................................................... 5-25
Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-24
Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-46
Coolant Temperature Warning Light ................ 3-46
Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5-12
Exhaust ..................................................... 2-33
Oil ............................................................. 5-16
Oil Life System ........................................... 5-19
Overheated Protection Operating Mode ........... 5-30

Engine (cont.)
Overheating ................................................ 5-28
Starting ...................................................... 2-23
Supercharger Oil ......................................... 5-20
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) ...................... 4-11
Warning Light ............................................. 3-45
Entry Lighting ................................................. 3-18
Event Data Recorders (EDR) ............................. 7-9
Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-29
Exterior Lamps ............................................... 3-15
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver .......................... 3-17

F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-21
Finish Damage ............................................. 5-107
Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-9
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-77
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-88
Flat Tire, Storing ............................................. 5-97
Fluid
Automatic Transaxle ..................................... 5-23
Power Steering ........................................... 5-40
Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-41
Fog Lamp Light .............................................. 3-50
Fog Lamps .................................................... 3-17
Folding Rear Seat ............................................ 1-9
Folding Seatback, Passenger ............................. 1-7

Front Reading Lamps ...................................... 3-20
Front Seat Storage Net .................................... 2-42
Fuel ............................................................... 5-5
Additives ...................................................... 5-6
California Fuel .............................................. 5-6
Filling a Portable Fuel Container ..................... 5-9
Filling Your Tank ........................................... 5-7
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-7
Gage ......................................................... 3-51
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-5
Fuses
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-112
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ....................... 5-112
Underhood Fuse Block ............................... 5-114
Windshield Wiper ....................................... 5-111

G
Gage
Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-46
Fuel .......................................................... 3-51
Speedometer .............................................. 3-37
Tachometer ................................................. 3-37
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................ 5-5
Specifications ............................................... 5-5
Glove Box ..................................................... 2-40
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 7-5
5

H
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6
Head Restraints ............................................... 1-6
Headlamp
Aiming ....................................................... 5-50
Headlamp Wiring ........................................... 5-111
Headlamps
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-53
Daytime Running Lamps ............................... 3-16
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-9
Front Turn Signal, Parking and Fog Lamps ..... 5-56
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-53
Headlamps and Sidemarker Lamps ................ 5-54
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8
On Reminder .............................................. 3-15
Headlamps and Sidemarker Lamps ................... 5-54
Head-Up Display (HUD) ................................... 3-21
Heated Seats ................................................... 1-3
Heater ........................................................... 3-26
Heater ........................................................... 3-29
Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-51
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-25
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-26
Hood
Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10
Release ..................................................... 5-11

6

Horn ............................................................... 3-6
How to Use This Manual ...................................... ii
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-15

I
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-22
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-33
Inflation -- Tire Pressure .................................. 5-67
Inflator Kit, Tire ............................................... 5-79
Instrument Panel
Overview ..................................................... 3-4
Instrument Panel (I/P)
Brightness .................................................. 3-18
Cluster ....................................................... 3-36
Interior Lamps ................................................ 3-17

J
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-46

K
Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-3
Keys ............................................................... 2-2

L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall .....................................
Lamps
Battery Run-Down Protection .........................
Courtesy ....................................................
Exterior ......................................................
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ......................
Fog ...........................................................
Front Reading .............................................
Interior .......................................................
Overhead Console Reading ..........................
Rear Assist Handle Reading ..........................
LATCH System
Child Restraints ...........................................
Light
Airbag Readiness ........................................
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ...................
Brake System Warning .................................
Cruise Control .............................................
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning .............
Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
Warning Light ..........................................
Fog Lamp ..................................................
Highbeam On .............................................

5-62
3-20
3-18
3-15
3-17
3-17
3-20
3-17
3-20
3-20
1-41
3-39
3-44
3-42
3-51
3-46
3-45
3-50
3-51

Light (cont.)
Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-47
Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-50
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator .................. 3-40
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder .................... 3-38
Safety Belt Reminder ................................... 3-38
TCS Warning Light ...................................... 3-45
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning .......... 3-45
Up-Shift ..................................................... 3-42
Lighting
Delayed Entry ............................................. 3-19
Delayed Exit ............................................... 3-19
Entry ......................................................... 3-18
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-33
Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-13
Locks
Delayed Locking .......................................... 2-11
Door .......................................................... 2-10
Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-13
Power Door ................................................ 2-11
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-12
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-12
Loss of Control ............................................... 4-18
Lumbar
Power Controls ............................................. 1-3

7

M

N

Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6
At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-9
At Least Once a Month .................................. 6-9
At Least Once a Year .................................. 6-10
Introduction .................................................. 6-2
Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 6-7
Maintenance Record .................................... 6-14
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ......... 6-13
Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-8
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-12
Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4
Using .......................................................... 6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-47
Manual Passenger Seat .................................... 1-2
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-72
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview with Compass
and Temperature Display ........................... 2-35
Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ............. 2-35
Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-38
Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-37
MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-3

Navigation/Radio System, see
Navigation Manual ..................................... 3-139
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-21
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ............ 6-13

8

O
Odometer ...................................................... 3-37
Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-16
Oil
Engine ....................................................... 5-16
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-50
Supercharger, Engine ................................... 5-20
Oil, Engine Oil Life System .............................. 5-19
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-30
Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-3
OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ............... 2-38
Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-6
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-33
Outside
Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-38
Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-37
Overhead Console .......................................... 2-42
Overhead Console Reading Lamps .................... 3-20
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode ..... 5-30
Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-8
Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii

P

Q

Park (P)
Shifting Into ................................................ 2-31
Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-32
Parking
Brake ........................................................ 2-30
Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-33
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................... 3-40
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ..................... 3-33
Passenger Sensing System .............................. 1-61
Passing ......................................................... 4-16
PASS-Key® III ................................................ 2-19
PASS-Key® III Operation .................................. 2-20
Power ............................................................. 1-2
Accessory Outlet(s) ...................................... 3-24
Door Locks ................................................. 2-11
Electrical System ....................................... 5-111
Lumbar Controls ........................................... 1-3
Retained Accessory (RAP) ............................ 2-22
Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-40
Windows .................................................... 2-16
Pressure Cap ................................................. 5-28
Pretensioners, Safety Belt ................................ 1-29
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................. 2-12

Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-14

R
Radios .......................................................... 3-94
Care of Your CD Player .............................. 3-141
Care of Your CDs ...................................... 3-141
Navigation/Radio System, see
Navigation Manual .................................. 3-139
Radio with CD ................................... 3-96, 3-107
Radio with Six-Disc CD .............................. 3-123
Setting the Time .......................................... 3-96
Theft-Deterrent .......................................... 3-139
Understanding Reception ............................ 3-140
Rear Assist Handle Reading Lamps ................... 3-20
Rear Door Security Locks ................................ 2-12
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ...................... 1-26
Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .................. 1-23
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with
Compass and Temperature Display ................ 2-35
Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ........................... 2-35
Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-4

9

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-12
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-38
Remote Keyless Entry System ............................ 2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ............ 2-4
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare
Tire ........................................................... 5-91
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-90
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-59
Replacement, Windshield ................................. 5-60
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government .................................. 7-14
General Motors ........................................... 7-14
United States Government ............................ 7-13
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems .................... 1-67
Replacing Restraint System Parts After a
Crash ..................................................... 1-67
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-22
Right Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts ...... 1-23
Roadside
Assistance Program ....................................... 7-6
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-33
Running the Engine While Parked ..................... 2-34

10

S
Safety Belt
Passenger Reminder Light ............................ 3-38
Pretensioners .............................................. 1-29
Reminder Light ............................................ 3-38
Safety Belts
Care of .................................................... 5-104
Driver Position ............................................ 1-16
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-15
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ..... 1-14
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ................... 1-26
Rear Seat Passengers ................................. 1-23
Right Front Passenger Position ...................... 1-23
Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-29
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-23
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ....................... 1-10
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 1-22
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii
Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4
Seatback, Folding Passenger ............................. 1-7

Seats
Head Restraints ............................................ 1-6
Heated Seats ............................................... 1-3
Manual Passenger ......................................... 1-2
Passenger Folding Seatback ........................... 1-7
Power Lumbar .............................................. 1-3
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-4
Six-Way Power Driver .................................... 1-2
Split Folding Rear Seat .................................. 1-9
Securing a Child Restraint
Rear Seat Position ...................................... 1-46
Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-48
Service ........................................................... 5-3
Accessories and Modifications ......................... 5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle .............................................. 5-5
California Proposition 65 Warning .................... 5-3
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4
Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-47
Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-14
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-65
Setting the Time ............................................. 3-96
Sheet Metal Damage ..................................... 5-107
Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-31
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-32

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................... 1-22
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-7
Spare Tire
Compact .................................................... 5-99
Installing .................................................... 5-91
Removing ................................................... 5-90
Storing ....................................................... 5-97
Specifications, Capacities ............................... 5-118
Speedometer .................................................. 3-37
Split Folding Rear Seat ..................................... 1-9
StabiliTrak® Plus System ................................. 4-12
Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-23
Steering ........................................................ 4-13
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ....................... 3-139
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-6
Storage Areas
Center Console Storage Area ........................ 2-42
Convenience Net ......................................... 2-43
Cupholder(s) ............................................... 2-41
Front Seat Storage Net ................................ 2-42
Glove Box .................................................. 2-40
Overhead Console ....................................... 2-42
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ...................... 4-32
Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-17
Sunroof ......................................................... 2-43

11

T
Tachometer .................................................... 3-37
Taillamps
Turn Signal, and Stoplamps .......................... 5-57
TCS Warning Light .......................................... 3-45
Theft-Deterrent, Radio .................................... 3-139
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-17
Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-17
PASS-Key® III ............................................. 2-19
PASS-Key® III Operation .............................. 2-20
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-6
Tires ............................................................. 5-60
Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning ........................ 5-106
Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-72
Chains ....................................................... 5-77
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-88
Cleaning ................................................... 5-107
Compact Spare Tire ..................................... 5-99
Different Size .............................................. 5-73
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-77
Inflation -- Tire Pressure ............................... 5-67
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-70
Installing the Spare Tire ................................ 5-91
Removing the Flat Tire ................................. 5-91
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............... 5-90
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............ 5-97

12

Tires (cont.)
Tire Inflator Kit ............................................ 5-79
Tire Sidewall Labeling .................................. 5-62
Tire Terminology and Definitions .................... 5-64
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-74
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-75
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-75
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-71
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-38
Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-40
Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-38
Traction
Control System (TCS) .................................... 4-9
Control System Warning Light ....................... 3-45
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) ................... 4-11
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) Warning
Light ...................................................... 3-45
StabiliTrak® Plus System .............................. 4-12
Transaxle
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-23
Transaxle Operation, Automatic ......................... 2-25
Transmission
Up-Shift Light .............................................. 3-42
Trunk ............................................................ 2-13
Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-7
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7

U

W

Understanding Radio Reception ....................... 3-140
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-74
Up-Shift Light ................................................. 3-42

Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-35
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-72
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6
Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-6
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii
Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-75
Different Size .............................................. 5-73
Replacement ............................................... 5-75
Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-40
Windows ....................................................... 2-15
Power ........................................................ 2-16
Windshield
Wiper Blades, Cleaning .............................. 5-106
Windshield Replacement .................................. 5-60

V
Vehicle
Control ........................................................ 4-5
Damage Warnings ........................................... iv
Loading ...................................................... 4-33
Symbols ......................................................... iv
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders .................................................... 7-9
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ............................................ 5-110
Service Parts Identification Label .................. 5-110
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-33
Visors ........................................................... 2-17

13

Windshield Washer
Fluid .......................................................... 5-41
Windshield Wiper
Blade Replacement ...................................... 5-60
Fuses ...................................................... 5-111
Windshield Wiper Lever ..................................... 3-9
Winter Driving ................................................ 4-28

14

X
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .............. 3-142

Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2



---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.5-c012 1.149602, 2012/10/10-18:10:24
Format                          : application/pdf
Modified                        : 2014:11:03 10:06:08.452-05:00
Creator                         : EDS
Title                           : Owner's Manual
Size                            : 2958693
Author                          : EDS
Sha 1                           : 74bf7cfa87970a400c61d32c17d33cc1abd19176
Extracted                       : 2014:11:02 13:48:27.727-06:00
Modify Date                     : 2005:08:02 07:07:12-05:00
Metadata Date                   : 2005:08:02 07:07:12-05:00
Create Date                     : 2005:08:01 02:16:05-05:00
Creator Tool                    : XPP
Keywords                        : 
Producer                        : 
Tags                            : OwnerCenter:GMNA/asset_type/owner_manual, OwnerCenter:GMNA/2006/pontiac/grand_prix
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 472

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools